Home

Lenovo ThinkPad X220 Tablet

image

Contents

1. The surface of your finger is very different from the one you used when you enrolled your fingerprint Your finger is wet A finger that has not been enrolled is used To improve the situation try the following Clean or wipe your hands to remove any excess dirt or moisture from the fingers Enroll and use a different finger for authentication If your hands are too dry apply lotion to them Battery and power This section tells what to do if you have a battery and power problem This section includes five topics Battery ac power adapter Power Power button Startup and Sleep standby and hibernation Check these topics to find the related information Battery problems e Problem The battery pack cannot be fully charged by the power off method in the standard charge time for your computer Solution The battery pack might be over discharged Do the following 228 User Guide 1 Turn off the computer 2 Make sure that the over discharged battery pack is in the computer 3 Connect the ac power adapter to the computer and let it charge If the optional Quick Charger is available use it to charge the over discharged battery pack If the battery pack cannot be fully charged in 24 hours use a new battery pack e Problem Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty or Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty Solution Discharge and recharg
2. To remove the hard disk password type the current password in the Enter Current Password field Then leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank and press Enter A User Guide Setup Notice window is displayed Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window The user hard disk password will be removed To change or remove the User Master hard disk password select User HDP or Master HDP If you choose User HDP do one of the following e To change the user hard disk password type the current user hard disk password or the current master hard disk password in the Enter Current Password field Then type the new user hard disk password in the Enter New Password field and retype the password you just entered to verify it in the Confirm New Password field Press Enter and a Setup Notice window is displayed Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window The user hard disk password will be changed e To remove the user hard disk password type the current master hard disk password in the Enter Current Password field Then leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank and press Enter A Setup Notice window is displayed Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window Both the user and master hard disk passwords will be removed If you choose Master HDP do one of the following e To change the master hard disk password type the current master hard disk password in the Enter Current Password fi
3. or minus button Setting the volume Each device has volume controls which you can set To open the window for adjusting the output volume or the recording volume do the following For Windows 7 and Windows Vista 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Sound The Sound window appears 2 Click the Playback tab or Recording tab and then click a device which you want to customize 3 Click the Properties button 4 Click the Levels tab and then change the volume by moving the slider For Windows XP 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Sounds Speech and Audio Devices gt Sounds and Audio Device The Sounds and Audio Device Properties window appears 2 Click the Audio tab and then click the Volume button in Sound Playback or Sound Recording Notes e You can also get access to the desktop volume control by using the volume icon in the task bar at the lower right of the screen To open the Volume Control window click the volume icon To control the volume move the volume control slider up or down To turn off the sound select Mute speakers in Windows Vista and Windows XP Mute e The names of windows or fields are slightly different depending on the operating system you use 52 User Guide e For details about controlling volume refer to your Windows online help Setting the microphone mute button in Windows 7 and Windows Vista By default you can toggle all of your recording devices bet
4. 6 Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window Note The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer Click OK If the information is incorrect reinstall the device driver See below for more information For Windows Vista 1 Click Display Settings Click the Advanced Settings button Click the Adapter tab Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window a A WwW N 6 Right click on the desktop and click Personalize Note The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer Click OK If the information is incorrect reinstall the device driver See below for more information For Windows XP 1 Click the Settings tab Click Advanced Click the Adapter tab Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window a A WwW N 6 Right click on the desktop and click Properties to open the Display Properties window Note The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer Click OK If the information is incorrect reinstall the device driver See below for more information Check the monitor type and if necessary update the driver by doing the following For Windows 7 1 Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector and then connect
5. Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems 213 If it is check with your LAN administrator for the necessary settings e Problem If your computer is a Gigabit Ethernet model it cannot connect to the network at 1000 Mbps Instead it connects at 100 Mbps Solution Try another cable Make sure that the link partner is set to auto negotiate Make sure that the switch is 802 3ab compliant gigabit over copper A wireless LAN problem e Problem You cannot connect using the built in wireless networking card Solution Make sure that your wireless LAN driver is the latest version installed Check the Web site and confirm the driver version supported by Access Connections is the latest documented in the README file Make sure that your computer is within range of a wireless access point Make sure that the wireless radio is enabled by double clicking the Access Connections icon in the task bar Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model to display the Access Connections status icon and the wireless status icon in the system tray refer to the Access Connections on line help Check Network Name SSID and your encryption information Use Access Connections to verify this case sensitive information A wireless WAN problem e Message Unauthorized WAN card is plugged in Power off and remove the WAN card Solution The WAN card is not supported on this computer Remove it Note Depending on your computer some
6. Select UEFI Legacy Boot Select Legacy Only or Both Press F10 Insert the installation CD for Windows XP integrated with Service Pack 2 into the CD or DVD drive and restart the computer O ON OA A ON 10 Complete the installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2 by following OS installing instructions 11 Install Windows XP Service Pack 3 You can install the Windows XP Service Pack 3 using the Windows XP Service Pack 3 Installation CD or download it from either Microsoft Download Center or Microsoft Windows update Web site 12 Run Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver To do this go to C DRIVERS WIN IRST PREPARE and double click install cmd 13 Turn the computer off and then on again 14 Start the ThinkPad Setup 15 Select Config 16 Select Serial ATA SATA 17 Select AHCI 18 Start Windows XP The Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard appears 19 Select No not this time and then click Next 20 Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and then click Next 21 Select Search for the best driver in these locations Then select Include this location in the search specify the path C DRIVERS WIN IRST and click Next The Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard appears 22 Click Finish Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 177 23 When the System Settings Change window appears click Yes The computer restarts 24 Install the Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7
7. the system is not powered on nor resumed when AC is attached Table 6 Config menu items continued Menu item Submenu item Selection Comments Beep and Alarm Power Control Beep e Disabled If this function is enabled e Enabled a beep sounds when the computer enters a power management mode when it resumes operational mode and when the ac power adapter is connected or disconnected Low Battery Alarm e Disabled Enable or disable the low e Enabled battery alarm Password Beep e Disabled Enable this option to have e Enabled a beep sound when the system is waiting for a power on hard disk or supervisor password Different beeps will be sounded when the entered password matches or does not match the configured password Keyboard Beep e Enabled Enable or disable keyboard e Disabled beep when unmanageable key combinations are pressed Serial ATA SATA SATA Controller Mode e Compatibility Select SATA controller Option e AHCI operation mode If your system supports RAID e RAID select RAID If you select Compatibility mode serial SATA controller operates in compatibility mode Core Multi Processing e Disabled Enable or disable additional Enabled execution core units within pecs a CPU Note If you are using a computer with a single core processor this item does not appear Note For Core Multi Processing refer to the instructions in Installing Windows XP on page 176 Intel
8. For Windows Vista Attach the computer to an external monitor Right click on the desktop and click Personalize Click Display Settings Click the Monitor 2 icon Select the Extend the desktop onto this monitor check box Click the Monitor 1 icon for the primary display the computer display Select the Resolution and Colors of the primary display ON OOF WD Click the Monitor 2 icon for the external monitor 224 User Guide 9 Select the Resolution and Colors of the secondary display 10 Set the relative position of the each monitor by dragging its icon You can set the monitors in any relative position but the icons must touch each other 11 Click OK to apply the changes For Windows XP Attach the computer to an external monitor Right click on the desktop and click Properties to open the Display Properties window Click the Settings tab Click the Monitor 2 icon Select the Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor check box Click the Monitor 1 icon for the primary display the computer display Select the screen resolution and color quality of the primary display Click the Monitor 2 icon for the external monitor Select the screen resolution and color quality of the secondary display O O DAN OA RA O N Set the relative position of the each monitor by dragging its icon You can set the monitors in any relative position but the icons must touch each othe
9. H Battery status e Green The battery charge level is 20 or higher e Orange The battery charge level is between 5 and 20 e Fast blinking orange The battery charge level is lower than 5 e Slow blinking orange The battery is being charged When it reaches 20 the blinking color changes to green e Slow blinking green The battery has between 20 and 80 charge and charging is continuing When the battery reaches 80 charge the battery status indicator stops blinking but the charging may continue until the battery is 100 charged 22 User Guide Note If the computer is operating on battery power the battery status indicator does not work while the computer is turned off or is in sleep Standby mode or hibernation mode e Quick blinking orange An error occurred in the battery e The battery status indicator blinks three times The ac power adapter is attached to the computer e The battery status indicator is off The battery is fully charged or the battery is detached Locating important product information This section provides information to help you locate your machine type and model label FCC ID and IC Certification label and Windows Certificate of Authenticity Machine type and model label The machine type and model label identifies your computer If you contact Lenovo for help the machine type and model number will help support technicians to identify your computer and provide the highest level of service
10. Note If you want to use the combination to put the computer into hibernation mode or do nothing mode in Windows XP shut the computer down or show the panel for turning off the computer change the settings in Power Manager e Fn F12 Put your computer in hibernation mode To return to normal operation press the power button for less than four seconds Notes Though the screen fades out immediately after Fn F12 are pressed the computer does not enter the hibernation mode immediately Do not move the system until the Status indicators stops blinking Moving the computer when it is entering hibernation may cause corruption of the hard drive Chapter 2 Using your computer 49 To use Fn F3 Fn F4 and Fn F12 key combinations you must have the ThinkPad PM device driver installed on your computer For information on the power management function refer to Power management on page 58 Applying a presentation scheme e Fn F7 Apply a presentation scheme directly with no need to start Presentation Director To disable this function and use the Fn F7 key combination for switching a display output location start Presentation Director and change the settings Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Presentation Director For information on applying a presentation scheme refer to Presentation Director on page 37 Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model it does not support presentation schemes however t
11. The power switch turns the computer on and off H The eject button releases the computer from the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 when pressed EJ The sliding adjuster is a guide used to align the docking connector on your computer as you attach the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 EJ The docking connector is where you attach your computer 160 User Guide ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 Ho The power switch turns the computer on and off H The key lock indicator lights when the system lock key is in the locked position When the system lock key is in the locked position the eject button of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 is locked you cannot attach or remove your computer EJ The docking indicator lights when your computer is docked E The eject button releases the computer from the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 when pressed H The sliding adjuster is a guide used to align the docking connector on your computer as you attach the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 Qi The docking connector is where you attach your computer The system lock key is for locking the eject button Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer 161 ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 Ho The power switch turns the computer on and off H The key lock indicator lights when the system lock key is in the locked position When the system lock key is in the locked position the eject button of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 is locked you cannot attach or rem
12. You can find the machine type and model of your computer in the label as shown below ThinkPad X220 and X220i TYPE 0000 000 S N 00 0000 00 00 PRODCT ID 0000000 Chapter 1 Product Overview 23 ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet TYPE 0000 000 S N 00 0000 00 00 PRODCT ID 0000000 FCC ID and IC Certification number label This section provides FCC ID and IC Certification number label location for your computer 24 User Guide ThinkPad X220 and X220i FCC ID and IC Certification number label There is no FCC ID or IC Certification number for the PCI Express Mini Card shown on the enclosure of your computer The FCC ID and IC Certification number label is affixed on the card installed in the PCI Express Mini Card slot of your computer TX FCC ID and IC Certification number for installed transmitter cards are located under the customer removable access panel Keyboard or Palmrest see User Manual WWAN PCI i A WLAN Full Half PCI Express Mini Card Express Mini Card If no integrated wireless PCI Express Mini Card has been preinstalled in your computer you can install one To do this follow the procedure in Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN WiMAX connection on page 131 or Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless WAN connection on page 137 Chapter 1 Product Overview 25 ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet FCC ID and IC Certification
13. 3 On the Startup Device Menu select the USB hard disk drive as the first boot device and press Enter The rescue medium starts e If you have created a rescue medium using the secondary internal hard disk drive set the secondary internal hard disk drive as the first boot device in the startup device sequence to start the rescue medium See Startup menu on page 184 When the rescue medium starts the Rescue and Recovery workspace opens The help information for each feature is available from the Rescue and Recovery workspace Follow the instructions to complete the recovery process Reinstalling preinstalled applications and device drivers Your computer has provisions that enable you to reinstall selected factory installed applications and device drivers Reinstalling preinstalled applications To reinstall selected application programs do the following 1 Turn on your computer 2 Use Windows Explorer or Computer in Windows XP My Computer to display the directory structure of your hard disk Open the C SWTOOLS folder Open the APPS folder In it are several subfolders named for the various preinstalled applications Open the subfolder for the application you are reinstalling ona KR Ww Double click Setup and then follow the on screen steps to reinstall the program Reinstalling preinstalled device drivers Attention When you reinstall device drivers you are changing the current configuration of your comp
14. 6 Click OK to apply the changes Using audio features Your computer is equipped with the following e Combo audio jack 1 8 inch 3 5 mm in diameter e Built in stereo speakers e Built in dual array digital microphone Your computer also has an audio chip that enables you to enjoy various multimedia audio features e Compliant with Intel High Definition Audio Chapter 2 Using your computer 77 e Recording and playback of PCM and WAV files in 16 bit or 24 bit format e Playback of a WAV file at a sample rate of 44 1KHz to 192 KHz e Playback of MIDI files through a Wave table synthesizer under Microsoft Windows operating systems e Playback of MP3 files through the Windows Media Player or a software MP3 player e Recording from various sound sources such as a headset attached either to the combo audio jack of your computer or to the microphone jack of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 Note The combo audio jack does not support a conventional microphone The following table shows which functions of the audio devices attached to the jacks on your computer or docking station are supported Table 3 Audio feature list Jacks Headset with a 3 5 mm Conventional headphone Conventional microphone 4 pole plug Combo audio jack Headphone and Headphone function Not supported microphone functions supported supported Headphone jack of the Only headphone function Headphone function Not suppor
15. If the system is still not reset remove the ac power adapter and the battery The power switch can also be programmed via Power Manager to shut down the computer or put it into sleep standby or hibernation E PCI Express Mini Card slot for wireless LAN WiMAX Your computer might include a PCI Express Mini Card in the PCI Express Mini Card slot which enables wireless LAN WiMAX communications EJ PCI Express Mini Card slot for wireless WAN or mSATA solid state drive SSD Your computer might include a PCI Express Mini Card in the PCI Express Mini Card slot which enables wireless WAN communications With Lenovo technologies advancing to provide you with the best engineered systems some models are equipped with an mSATA solid state drive for data storage This cutting edge technology enables notebook computers to be lighter smaller and faster Fingerprint reader Some models have the fingerprint reader The fingerprint authentication technology enables you to use your fingerprint to start the computer and enter the ThinkPad Setup For details refer to the instructions in Using a fingerprint reader on page 97 Chapter 1 Product Overview 3 TrackPoint buttons Eq Touch pad EE TrackPoint pointing stick The keyboard contains the unique TrackPoint pointing device Pointing selecting and dragging are all part of a single process that you can perform without moving your fingers from typing position Move your fingertip acros
16. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs 1 4 Das Ger t erf llt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse B Appendix A Regulatory Information 247 Korea Class B compliance statement J N FE JAA ASSE ASS UCH Japan VCCI Class B compliance statement CORE J7IABSRRHRECT CORES RERA TEATA T EZEWELTURTH CORBPIVAPFLEV AY SERTEL TE Anat BBSAEHRCFCEMHWET RRRA Bl HED TIL URW RUELTREW VCCI B Japan compliance statement for products which connect to the power mains with rated current less than or equal to 20 A per phase ARORBERA 20A A OMIT gt SRS RAR SARENA JISC 61000 3 2 H6 m Lenovo product service information for Taiwan 8 Lenovo ERMRBAAUT fay Bi Fe AB AR 12 BR 2S a BB Zs FA HeRRESRARCHTHNEZ ARI Bis O800 000 702 Pointer to the printed pub for additional regulatory information For additional regulatory information refer to the Regulatory Notice shipped with your computer If your computer is shipped without the Regulatory Notice you can find it at the Web site http www lenovo com support For details refer to the instructions on Locating wireless regulatory notices on page 245 248 User Guide Appendix B WEEE and recycling statements Lenovo encourages owners of information technology equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recyc
17. Right click on the desktop and click Properties to open the Display Properties window 5 Click the Settings tab 6 Click Advanced 7 Click the Monitor tab 8 Select the correct refresh rate e Problem Wrong characters appear on the screen Solution Did you follow the correct procedure in installing the operating system or application program If you did have the external monitor serviced e Problem The Extend desktop function does not work Solution Enable the Extend desktop function by doing the following For Windows 7 1 Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet Turn on the external monitor and the computer Right click on the desktop and click Screen resolution Click the Monitor 2 icon Select Extend these displays for Multiple displays Click the Monitor 1 icon for the primary display the computer display Select the Resolution of the primary display Click the Monitor 2 icon for the external monitor Select the Resolution of the secondary display O O AN DOA FW PY i Set the relative position of the each monitor by dragging its icon You can set the monitors in any relative position but the icons must touch each other ay Click OK to apply the changes Note To change the color settings right click on the desktop and click Screen resolution Click Advanced Settings select the Monitor tab then set Colors
18. The system CMOS might have been corrupted by an application program The computer uses the default settings Run the ThinkPad Setup to reconfigure the settings If you still see the same error code have the computer serviced Message 0253 EFI Variable Block Data was destroyed Solution The system EFI Variable Block Data might have been corrupted 1 Press F1 to go to the ThinkPad Setup 2 Press F9 and then press Enter to load the default setting 3 Press F10 and then press Enter to restart the system If you still have a problem have the computer serviced Message 0271 Check date and time settings Solution Neither the date nor the time is set in the computer Set the date and time using the ThinkPad Setup Message 1802 Unauthorized network card is plugged in Power off and remove the network card Solution The mini PCI Express network card is not supported on this computer Remove it Message 1820 More than one external fingerprint readers are attached Solution Power off and remove all but the reader that you set up within your main operating system Message 2000 ThinkVantage Active Protection sensor diagnostics failed Solution ThinkVantage Active Protection sensor is not working correctly Have the computer serviced Message 2100 Detection error on HDDO Main HDD Solution The hard disk is not working Have the hard disk serviced Message 2101 Detection error on HDD1 Ultrabay HDD Solution The hard disk is
19. a bed sofa carpet or other flexible surface Never block cover or disable these features When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer it generates heat Do not place the adapter in contact with any part of your body while using it Never use the ac power adapter to warm your body Extended contact with your body even through clothing may cause a skin burn For your safety always follow these basic precautions with your computer Keep the cover closed whenever the computer is plugged in Regularly inspect the outside of the computer for dust accumulation Remove dust from vents and any perforations in the bezel More frequent cleanings might be required for computers in dusty or high traffic areas Do not restrict or block any ventilation openings Do not operate your computer inside furniture as this might increase the risk of overheating Airflow temperatures into the computer should not exceed 35 C 95 F Copyright Lenovo 2011 xiii Electrical current safety information Avice Electric current from power telephone and communication cables is hazardous To avoid a shock hazard Do not use your computer during a lightning storm Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation maintenance or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet Connect to properly wired outlet
20. and indicators on page 1 Locating important product information on page 23 Specifications on page 30 Operating environment on page 32 ThinkVantage Technologies and software on page 32 Locating computer controls connectors and indicators This section introduces you to the hardware features of your computer and then gives you the basic information you ll need to start taking advantage of its functions Front Right side Left side Rear Bottom Status indicators Front view This section introduces front view of your notebook computer Copyright Lenovo 2011 1 ThinkPad X220 and X220i front view Figure 1 ThinkPad X220 and X220i front view Wireless WAN auxiliary and Wireless LAN WiMAX H Integrated camera auxiliary EJ ThinkLight Ef Wireless LAN third Wireless LAN WiMAX main and Wireless WAN main E Computer display i System and power status indicators Power switch EJ PC Express Mini Card slot for wireless LAN WiMAX EJ PCI Express Mini Card slot for wireless WAN or mSATA Fingerprint reader solid state drive SSD TrackPoint buttons EH Touch pad EE TrackPoint pointing stick Fn key CapsLock indicator EQ ThinkVantage button Volume control buttons EE Built in microphones E Wireless WAN auxiliary and Wireless LAN WiMAX auxiliary E Wireless LAN third Wireless LAN WiMAX main and Wireless WAN main The built in antennas for the wireless communication are l
21. deleting data from your hard disk or solid state drive on page 105 Getting connected in different locations is a challenge e To troubleshoot a wireless networking issue go to http www lenovo com support faq e Take advantage of the networking features by use of Access Connections e To learn more about using the wireless features of your computer refer to Wireless connections on page 62 e To travel more confidently be sure to check the tips in Traveling with your computer on page 86 e Press Fn F5 or use the wireless radio switch on page 12 to enable or disable the wireless features Need to give presentations or attach an external monitor often e Use Presentation Director to set up a presentation Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model it does not support Presentation Director however the Fn F7 key combination may still be used to switch display output location e Make sure that you follow the procedure for Attaching an external monitor on page 71 e With the Extend desktop function you can display output on both the computer display and the external monitor Need to attach or replace a device e See Chapter 6 Replacing devices on page 115 for more information about replacing the devices of your computer e See Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer on page 149 for more information about enhancing the features of your computer You ve been using your computer for some time alrea
22. do as follows 1 Turn off the computer then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer 2 Close the computer display and turn the computer over 3 Remove the battery For more information refer to Replacing the battery on page 116 128 User Guide 4 Remove the screw that secures the solid state drive J Then flip out the cover H and pull up to remove it i 5 Remove the solid state drive by pulling out the tab 6 Detach the side spacer rails from the hard disk drive Chapter 6 Replacing devices 129 7 Attach the side spacer rails to a new hard disk drive 8 Insert the solid state drive into the hard disk drive bay then press it firmly into place 9 Reinstall the cover of the bay ff then reinstall the screw E 10 Reinstall the battery For more information about how to reinstall the battery refer to Replacing the battery on page 116 11 Turn the computer over again Connect the ac power adapter and the cables to the computer 130 User Guide Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN WiMAX connection Before you start print these instructions Your computer has a PCI Express Mini Card slot for connection to a wireless LAN WiMAX To replace the PCI Express Mini Card with a new one read the following prerequisites Prerequisites for the procedure Mrooncen During electrical storms do not connect the cable to or disconnect it fro
23. is being used to read or write data When this indicator is blinking do not put the computer into sleep standby mode remove the device from the bay or turn off the computer H Bluetooth status e Green The feature is on and the radio link is ready for use or the data is being transmitted e Off The Bluetooth feature is disabled E Wireless LAN Wireless WAN WiMAX status e Green The wireless LAN feature the 802 11b g Standard 802 11a b g or 802 11n draft 2 0 wireless WAN feature or WiMAX feature is on and the radio link is ready for use or the data is being transmitted e Off Wireless network devices are disabled or the radio is turned off E Caps Lock Caps Lock mode is enabled You can enter all alphabetic characters A Z in upper case without pressing the Shift key i Speaker mute button and J Microphone mute button If you mute the sound and then turn off your computer the sound will remain muted when you turn on your computer again To turn on the sound press the plus or minus button Power On The power switch stays lit whenever the computer is on blinks when the computer is in sleep standby mode and is off when the computer is off Chapter 1 Product Overview 19 Ei Numeric lock By default when the numeric lock is on the numeric lock indicator is displayed on the screen To change the settings of the numeric lock indicator see Changing display settings on page 70 Note Another mo
24. on page 70 i Fingerprint reader Some models have the fingerprint reader The fingerprint authentication technology enables you to use your fingerprint to start the computer and enter the ThinkPad Setup For details refer to the instructions in Using a fingerprint reader on page 100 Power switch Use the power switch to turn on the computer To turn off your computer use the Start menu shutdown options If you cannot turn off the computer by this method press and hold the power switch for 2 seconds If your computer stops responding and you cannot turn it off press and hold the power switch for 4 seconds or more If the system is still not reset remove the ac power adapter and the battery The power switch can also be programmed via Power Manager to shut down the computer or put it into sleep standby or hibernation E ThinkVantage button You can use the ThinkVantage button to interrupt the startup sequence of your computer and start the Rescue and Recovery workspace which runs independently of the Windows operating system and is hidden from it Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model you can press ThinkVantage button to open Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox EJ PCI Express Mini Card slot for wireless LAN WiMAX Your computer might include a PCI Express Mini Card in the PCI Express Mini Card slot which enables wireless LAN WiMAX communications 6 User Guide PCI Express Mini Card slot for wireless WAN or mSATA so
25. or liquid leakage from the battery pack A battery pack other than the one specified by Lenovo or a disassembled or modified battery pack is not covered by the warranty Asiiicc If the rechargeable battery pack is incorrectly replaced there is danger of an explosion The battery pack contains a small amount of harmful substances To avoid possible injury Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo Keep the battery pack away from fire Do not expose it to excessive heat Do not expose it to water or rain Do not short circuit it Store it in a cool dry place Keep it away from children The battery pack is a consumable supply If your battery begins to discharge too quickly replace the battery pack with a new one of the type recommended by Lenovo For more information on replacing the battery pack contact your Customer Support Center Mooncen Do not drop crush puncture or subject to strong forces Battery abuse or mishandling can cause the battery to overheat which can cause gasses or flame to vent from the battery pack or coin cell If your battery is damaged or if you notice any discharge from your battery or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads stop using the battery and obtain a replacement from the battery manufacturer Chapter 2 Using your computer 61 Mroancen Only recharge the battery pack strictly according to instructions included in the product docu
26. Always hold the whole assembly For more details about the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 refer to the following e ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 top view on page 150 e ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 bottom view on page 151 e Attaching a ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 on page 151 e Detaching a ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 on page 153 e Security feature on page 154 Copyright Lenovo 2011 149 ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 top view El The docking connector is used for attaching the ThinkPad computer to the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 E The power jack is where you connect the AC adapter EJ The Ethernet connector is for connecting the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 to a LAN EJ The DisplayPort connector is for connecting a DisplayPort compatible display device H The Monitor connector is for attaching an external monitor or a projector to your computer Gi The headphone jack a jack 1 8 inch 3 5 mm in diameter is for connecting an external headphone EJ The microphone jack a jack 1 8 inch 8 5 mm in diameter is for connecting an external microphone EJ The Universal Serial Bus USB connector is for connecting the devices that conform to the USB interface EJ The security keyhole is for locking the dock The system lock key is for locking the eject button The bay is for optical disk drive or second hard disk drive 150 User Guide ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 bottom view 4 g8 By pressing the
27. By default this is set to Disabled If you set the supervisor password and enable this function no one but you can change any items in the ThinkPad Setup If you select Set Minimum Length you can specify a minimum length for power on passwords and hard disk passwords By default this is set to Disabled If you set the supervisor password and specify a minimum length for passwords no one but you can change the length Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 183 If you select and enable Password at unattended boot a password prompt is displayed when the computer is turned on from either a power off state or hibernation by an unattended event such as Wake on LAN If you select Disabled no password prompt is displayed the computer goes ahead and loads the operating system To prevent unauthorized access set the user authentication on the operating system If you select and enable Password at restart a password prompt is displayed when you restart the computer If you select Disabled no password prompt is displayed the computer goes ahead and loads the operating system To prevent unauthorized access set the user authentication on the operating system Startup menu You may need to change the startup sequence of your computer For example if you have different operating systems on different devices you can have the system start up from either of them Attention After you change your startup sequence you must be extremely careful not
28. Computer in the Start menu 2 Make sure that the docking indicator of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 is off Note Detaching the UltraBase suddenly while the computer is operating without performing the procedure above may cause the system to malfunction or hang To perform a warm detach press the eject request button of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 The system will then resume with an OK message Make sure that the docking indicator of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 is off The computer will re enter sleep standby mode If you are hot or warm detaching the computer make sure that e the devices connected to USB Serial and Parallel connectors are not in use e the connection to a Modem or Ethernet port has ended Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer 153 e the battery is fully charged To detach your computer from the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 do the following 1 Make sure that the system lock key of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 is in the unlocked vertical position 2 Close the computer display 3 If you are hot warm detaching the computer press the eject request button of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 Then make sure that the eject inhibit indicator of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 is off and the eject ready indicator lights up 4 Release the eject lever on the left side of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 J until the computer lifts up then remove the computer H Security feature The lock of the Thi
29. F12 3 Select the device you want to start first from the Boot menu Note The Boot menu is also shown when the system cannot boot from any devices or operating system was not found Boot submenu The following list showing the order in which devices will be started up is always displayed Even devices that are not attached to or installed on your computer are listed For each device that is attached to or installed on the computer information about it is presented after the colon 1 USB CD 184 User Guide USB FDD ATAPI CDO ATA HDDO ATA HDD1 ATA HDD2 USB HDD PCI LAN 9 ATAPI CD1 10 ATAPI CD2 11 ATA HDDS 12 ATA HDD4 13 Other CD 14 Other HDD ON OOF W PD Network Boot Use the Network Boot to select the boot device when the system wakes from LAN If Wake on LAN is enabled the network administrator can turn on all of the computers in a LAN remotely by use of network management software Other items in the Startup menu The following items are also displayed in the Startup menu of the ThinkPad Setup e UEFI Legacy Boot Select system boot capability e UEFI Legacy Boot Priority Select priority of boot option between UEFI and Legacy e Boot Mode Enable or disable the diagnostics boot mode e Option Key Display Choose whether to show the option key message when the system is booted e Boot device List F12 Option Choose whether to show the pop up list of the boot devices e Boot Order
30. Fn F5 Enable or disable the built in wireless networking features If you press Fn F5 a list of wireless features is displayed You can quickly change the power state of each feature in the list 50 User Guide Notes If you want to use Fn F5 to enable or disable the wireless features the following device drivers must be installed on your computer beforehand Power Management driver OnScreen Display Utility Wireless device drivers For information on the wireless features refer to Wireless connections on page 62 Launching the camera and audio settings Fn F6 If you press Fn F6 the camera and audio settings window is opened and the camera preview is turned on From this window you can change the camera and audio settings Note The Camera settings area only appears if your computer has an integrated camera For more information see Using an integrated camera on page 78 Other functions Fn PgUp Turn the ThinkLight on To turn it off press Fn PgUp again Note This function is supported only on the ThinkPad notebooks that have the ThinkLight The on or off status of the ThinkLight is shown on the screen for a few seconds when you press Fn PgUp Fn Home The computer display becomes brighter The purpose of this method is to change the brightness level temporarily On Windows Vista the default brightness level is loaded after sleep standby hibernation reboot or detaching or attaching an ac powe
31. Information in the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer Customer safety is important Our products are developed to be safe and effective However personal computers are electronic devices Power cords power adapters and other features can create potential safety risks that can result in physical injury or property damage especially if misused To reduce these risks follow the instructions included with your product observe all warnings on the product and in the operating instructions and review the information included in this document carefully By carefully following the information contained in this document and provided with your product you can help protect yourself from hazards and create a safer computer work environment Note This information includes references to power adapters and batteries In addition to notebook computers some products such as speakers and monitors ship with external power adapters If you have such a product this information applies to your product In addition computer products contain a coin sized internal battery that provides power to the system clock even when the computer is unplugged so the battery safety information applies to all computer products vi User Guide Conditions that require immediate action Products can become damaged due to misuse or neglect Some product damage is serious enough that the product should not be used again until it has been inspected and if
32. Lock Enable or disable the Boot Priority Order lock Restart menu If you need to close the ThinkPad Setup and restart the system select Restart from the ThinkPad Setup menu The following submenu is displayed e Exit Saving Changes Restart the system after saving the changes e Exit Discarding Changes Restart the system without saving the changes e Load Setup Defaults Load the default setting that was in effect at the time of purchase e Discard Changes Discard the changes e Save Changes Save the changes ThinkPad Setup items The following tables show the contents of the Config menu items on page 186 the Security menu items on page 192 and the Startup menu on page 196 of the ThinkPad Setup Note Some items are displayed on the menu only if the computer supports the corresponding features Notes Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 185 e Enabled means that the function is configured e Disabled means that the function is not configured e Default values are in boldface Config menu items Table 6 Config menu items Network Wake On LAN e Disabled Enable the system to Power e AC only on when the Ethernet l controller receives a magic e AC and Battery packet If you select AC Only Wake On LAN is enabled only when ac power adapter is attached If you select AC and Battery Wake On LAN is enabled with any power sources Note AC is required with magic packet type Wake On LAN N
33. Maximum Performance Always highest speed Battery Optimized Always lowest speed Disabled No runtime support lowest speed Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 189 Table 6 Config menu items continued Scheme for AC 190 User Guide Adaptive Thermal Management Optical Drive Speed CPU Power Management PCI Express Power Management Power On with AC Attach Maximize Performance Balanced Scheme for Battery Maximize Performance Balanced High Performance Normal Silent Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled This selects a thermal management scheme to use Maximize Performance Reduces CPU throttling Balanced Balances sound temperature and performance Note Each scheme affects fan sound temperature and performance Set the speed of optical drive to the desired performance Enable or disable the power saving feature that stop the microprocessor clock automatically when there are no system activities Normally it is not necessary to change the setting Enable or disable a feature that automatically adjusts power management when there is no PCI Express activity Normally it is not necessary to change the setting Enable or disable a feature that powers on the system when AC is attached If you select Enabled the system is powered on when AC is attached When the system is in hibernate state the system resumes If you select Disabled
34. Message 0188 Invalid RFID Serialization Information Area Solution The EEPROM checksum is not correct block 0 and 1 The system board should be replaced and the box serial number needs to be reinstalled Have the computer serviced Message 0189 Invalid RFID configuration information area Solution The EEPROM checksum is not correct block 4 and 5 The system board should be replace and the UUID needs to be reinstalled Have the computer serviced Message 0190 Critical low battery error Solution The computer turned off because the battery is low Connect the ac power adapter to the computer and charge the battery or replace the battery with a fully charged one Message 0191 System Security Invalid remote change requested Solution The system configuration change has failed Confirm the operation and try again To clear the error enter the ThinkPad Setup Message 0192 System Security Embedded Security hardware tamper detected Solution The Security Chip has been replaced with a different one Have the computer serviced Message 0199 System Security Security password retry count exceeded Solution This message is displayed if you enter a wrong supervisor password more than three times Confirm the supervisor password and try again To clear the error enter the ThinkPad Setup Message 0251 System CMOS checksum bad Default configuration used Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems 209 Solution
35. Mini Dock Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 you can extend the computer capabilities when you are in your office or at home EJ Memory upgrade slot You can increase the amount of memory in your computer by installing a memory module in the memory bay Memory modules are available as options H Built in stereo speakers The stereo speakers are built into your computer For details refer to the instructions in Volume and mute buttons on page 52 ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet bottom view Figure 8 Bottom view Battery H SIM card slot EJ Docking connector EJ Memory upgrade slot Battery Use your computer with battery power whenever ac power is unavailable 16 User Guide For details refer to the instructions in Power Manager on page 36 H SIM card slot If your computer has a wireless WAN feature it may require a SIM Subscriber Identification Module card to establish a wireless WAN Wide Area Network connections Depending on the country of delivery the SIM card may be already installed in the SIM card slot EJ Docking connector With a ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 you can extend the computer capabilities when you are in your office or at home EJ Memory upgrade slot You can increase the amount of memory in your computer by installing a memory module in the memory bay Memory modules are available as options Rear view This section introduces rear view of
36. Note If you cannot find this directory on your hard disk drive or solid state drive download the ThinkPad Monitor File for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 from the ThinkPad Web site at http www lenovo com support site wss document do sitestyle lenovo amp lndocid tpad matrix Note Before you install this file make sure that the correct video driver has been installed For Windows 7 Right click on the desktop and click Personalize Click Display at the left Click Change display settings Click Advanced Settings Click the Monitor tab Click Properties Click the Driver tab Click Update Driver Select Browse my computer for driver software and then click Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer 10 Click Have Disk 11 Specify path C SWTOOLS DRIVERS MONITOR to this monitor INF then click Open 12 Click OK 13 Confirm the correct display type then click Next eny Oo AON DOO FW PY 14 Windows has finished installing Click Close 15 Click Close for Display Properties 16 Click OK in the Monitor tab 17 Click OK and close the Display Settings window For Windows Vista Right click on the desktop and click Personalize Click Display Settings The Display Settings window opens Click Advanced Settings Click the Monitor tab Click Properties For Windows Vista also click Continue Click the Driver tab Click Update Driver Select Browse my compute
37. PCI Express Mini Card installed in your computer supports GPS your computer can receive signals from GPS satellites and determine its location If your computer is connected to the Internet you can find your location on a real time map provided by Google Maps or Microsoft Bing Maps To open ThinkVantage GPS do the following e For Windows 7 See Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 e For Windows Vista and Windows XP Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt ThinkVantage GPS For receiving the signals from GPS satellite keep the following best usage guidelines in mind e Keep your notebook away from your body e GPS antenna is located under the LCD screen Chapter 1 Product Overview 37 e Ensure that you place your notebook away from concrete or brick walls that may weaken satellite signals e Best reception will be available near windows and other locations where cellular phone reception is the strongest The GPS satellite signals may not available at following area e Inside of tunnel or basement e Inside of building or beside of building e Between tall building e Near the high voltage electric cables Note For ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet place your notebook on a flat surface and keep the lid open at a 105 degree angle notebook mode Lenovo SimpleTap Lenovo SimpleTap provides you a quick and customizable way to access your computer basic settings and some personalized features To
38. Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 and ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 To detach your computer from the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 and the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 do the following 1 Make sure that e The devices connected to USB connectors are not in use e The connection to an Ethernet port has been ended e The devices connected to an eSATA port are not in use ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 2 Make sure that the system lock key of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 is in place and in the unlocked horizontal position 168 User Guide 3 Press the eject button until the computer moves up then grasp both sides and remove the computer H To detach your computer from the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 do the following Notes e f your computer is operating make sure that it has finished operations involving devices that are connected to the USB connector Also make sure that any Ethernet connection is stopped e Make sure that the battery pack is fully charged 1 Make sure that all ejectable devices connected to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 are stopped 2 Press the eject button until the computer moves up then grasp both sides and remove the computer H Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer 169 Security feature The ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series
39. Store your external and removable hard disk or optical drives in the appropriate containers or packaging when they are not being used e Before you install any of the following devices touch a metal table or a grounded metal object This action reduces any static electricity from your body The static electricity could damage the device Memory module Mini PCl Card ExpressCard CompactFlash Smart card Memory Card such as SD Card SDHC Card SDXC Card and MultiMediaCard Note Not all listed devices are included in your computer This action reduces any static electricity from your body The static electricity could damage the device e When transferring data to or from a flash media card such as an SD card do not put your computer in sleep Standby or hibernation mode before the data transfer is complete To do so might cause damage to your data Take care in setting passwords e Remember your passwords If you forget a supervisor or hard disk password Lenovo will not reset it and you might have to replace your system board or hard disk drive or solid state drive Care for the fingerprint reader The following actions could damage the fingerprint reader or cause it not to work properly e Scratching the surface of the reader with a hard pointed object e Scraping the surface of the reader with your fingernail or anything hard e Using or touching the reader with a dirty finger If you notice any of the followi
40. The ThinkPad Setup opens Using the cursor keys move to Security The Security menu opens oar WOW DY Using the cursor keys move to Security Chip and press Enter The Security Chip submenu opens 96 User Guide 7 Using the cursor keys move to an item you want to set When the item you want is highlighted press Enter 8 Set the items you want to set 9 Press F10 to exit 10 Click Yes in the Setup Confirmation window To set the Security Chip you have to open the Client Security Solution and follow the instructions on the screen Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model Client Security Solution is not preinstalled on your system To configure the security chip you need to download the latest version of Client Security Solution from the Lenovo Web site To download Client Security Solution go to http www lenovo com support Then follow the instructions on the screen Using a fingerprint reader This section introduces how to use a fingerprint reader in your computer Using a fingerprint reader in ThinkPad X220 and X220i Depending on the options you ordered your computer may have an integrated fingerprint reader By enrolling your fingerprint and associating it with a power on password a hard disk password or both passwords beforehand you can start the computer log on to the system and enter the ThinkPad Setup by swiping your finger over the reader without typing a password Thus fingerprint authenticati
41. The static electricity could damage the card If a Wireless WAN is available in your computer to replace the PCI Express Mini Card do as follows 1 Turn off the computer then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer Wait for a few minutes till the inside of the computer cools before you start the following procedures Close the computer display and turn the computer over Remove the battery For details refer to the instructions in Remove the battery on page 116 Remove the keyboard For details refer to the instructions in Replacing the keyboard on page 118 Remove the palm rest For details refer to the instructions in Remove the palm rest on page 122 Oo a fF WwW PY If a tool for removing connectors is included in the package with the new card use it to disconnect the cables from the card If no such tool is included disconnect the cables by picking up the connectors with your fingers and gently unplugging them Note Depending on the system configuration of your computer the card may have only one connector 138 User Guide 7 Remove the screw The card pops up 8 Remove the card Chapter 6 Replacing devices 139 9 Align the contact edge of the new PCI Express Mini Card with the corresponding socket Note You can also replace the PCI Express Mini Card for Wireless WAN with an mSATA solid state drive 10 Pivot the card until you can snap it into
42. ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 not the one on the computer fi The Universal Serial Bus connectors are for connecting USB 1 1 and USB 2 0 devices Ei The external monitor connector is for connecting an external monitor Note If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 and use an external monitor connector use the external monitor connector on the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 not the one on the computer EJ When you attach a mechanical lock to the security keyhole the eject button is locked so that the computer cannot be removed from the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 164 User Guide ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 The DisplayPort is for connecting a display device H The digital visual interface connector is for connecting a monitor that supports Single Link DVI Note The DVI connector provides a digital interface only This connector can be used with a computer that supports DVI via docking only EJ The DisplayPort is for connecting a display device E The digital visual interface connector is for connecting a monitor that supports Single Link DVI Note The DVI connector provides a digital interface only This connector can be used with a computer that supports DVI via docking only H The Ethernet connector is for connecting the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 to an Ethernet LAN The indicator on the connector is the same as that on the computer Notes e You cannot use the Token Ring cable for this connec
43. To do this refer to Installing Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 on page 180 25 Apply the PCMCIA Power Policy Registry Patch To do this go to C SWTOOLS OSFIXES PCMCIAPW double click install bat and then follow the instructions that appear on the screen 26 Install device drivers To do this refer to Installing drivers and software on page 181 Installing device drivers To install device drivers refer to the web site http www lenovo com support Installing the driver for the 4 in 1 Media Card Reader To use the 4 in 1 Media Card Reader you need to download and install the Ricoh Multi Card Reader Driver for Windows XP Vista x86 x64 To download it go to Lenovo Web site at http www lenovo com support site wss document do sitestyle lenovo amp lndocid tpad matrix Note If you are installing Windows XP anew be sure to install RICOH SD MMC Bus Host Adapter driver for Windows 2000 XP 77sp05ww first To download it visit Lenovo Web site athttp www lenovo com support site wss document do sitestyle lenovo amp lndocid tpad matrix and then install the driver To install the driver do as follows 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt The DOS prompt window appears 2 Type StandardInstall bat at the DOS prompt The Welcome to the Device Driver Installation Wizard for the RICOH Media Driver opens 3 Click Next If the device driver is already installed click N
44. Windows 7 Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox The Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox is a diagnostic program that works through the Windows operating system It enables you to view symptoms of computer problems and solutions for them and includes automatic notification when action is required computing assistance and advanced diagnostics and diagnostic history For further information about diagnosing problems see Diagnosing problems using Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox on page 207 To open Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox do the following e For Windows 7 See Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 e For Windows Vista and Windows XP Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox For additional information about running the Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox program refer to the Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox help system Message Center Plus The Message Center Plus displays messages to inform you about helpful software that has been preinstalled on your computer The software enables you to manage wired and wireless connections protect your data in the event of a problem and automatically diagnose and resolve potential problems with your computer The Message Center Plus can also provide messages about new updates available to keep your computer current Password Manager The Password Manager program enables users to manage and remember all their sensitive and easy to forget application and Web site log
45. a last mile broadband connectivity similar to that offered by cable or ADSL but without the need to physically connect a cable to the PC To use the WiMAX feature start Access Connections For Windows 7 To start the Access Connections wizard see Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 and follow the instructions on the screen For Windows Vista and Windows XP To start the Access Connections wizard click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Access Connections Then follow the instructions on the screen Checking wireless connection status Access Connections Gauge Windows 7 If your computer is running Windows 7 the Access Connections Gauge in the task bar displays the signal strength and status of your wireless connection Note To display Access Connections Gauge in the task bar see the Help in Access Connections You can find more detailed information about the signal strength and status of your wireless connection by opening Access Connections or by right clicking the Access Connections Gauge in the task bar and selecting View Status of Wireless Connection e Access Connections Gauge states wireless LAN ttt Power to the wireless radio is off or no signal ttl Power to the wireless radio is on The signal strength of the wireless connection is poor To improve signal strength move your system closer to the wireless access point c BSa Power to the wireless radio is on The signal stre
46. accessible and located close to the equipment Do not fully extend power cords in a way that will stress the cords Be sure that the power outlet provides the correct voltage and current for the product you are installing Carefully connect and disconnect the equipment from the electrical outlet Power supply statement Mics Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached Hazardous voltage current and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label attached There are no serviceable parts inside these components If you suspect a problem with one of these parts contact a service technician External devices CAUTION Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than Universal Serial Bus USB and 1394 cables while the computer power is on otherwise you might damage your computer To avoid possible damage to attached devices wait at least five seconds after the computer is shut down to disconnect external devices X User Guide Batteries bancer Personal computers manufactured by Lenovo contain a coin cell battery to provide power to the system clock In addition many mobile products such as notebook computers utilize a rechargeable battery pack to provide system power when in portable mode Batteries supplied by Lenovo for use with your product have been tested for compatibility and should only be replaced with approved parts Nev
47. and Recovery arrow 3 Click the Restore your system from a backup icon 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the recovery operation e To perform a recovery operation using the Rescue and Recovery program on the Windows Vista operating system or the Windows XP operating system do the following 1 From the Windows desktop click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Rescue and Recovery The Rescue and Recovery program opens 2 Inthe Rescue and Recovery main window click Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery 3 Click the Restore your system from a backup icon 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the recovery operation For more information about performing a recovery operation from the Rescue and Recovery workspace see Using the Rescue and Recovery workspace on page 110 Using the Rescue and Recovery workspace The Rescue and Recovery workspace resides in a protected hidden area of your hard disk drive that operates independently from the Windows operating system This enables you to perform recovery operations even if you cannot start the Windows operating system You can perform the following recovery operations from the Rescue and Recovery workspace e Rescue files from your hard disk drive or from a backup The Rescue and Recovery workspace enables you to locate files on your hard disk drive and transfer them to a network drive or other recordable media such as a USB device or a disc
48. and reinstall the screw E 10 Reinstall the battery For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the battery on page 116 11 Turn the computer over again Connect the ac power adapter and the cables to the computer Replacing the solid state drive You can replace the solid state drive with a new one which can be purchased from your Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative To replace the solid state drive read the following prerequisites and select your model from the list below for instructions Note Replace the solid state drive only if you need to have it repaired The connectors and slot of the solid state drive were not designed for frequent changes or drive swapping Prerequisites for the procedure When replacing the drive be sure to follow the precautions Attention When you are handling a solid state drive e Do not drop the drive or subject it to physical shocks Put the drive on a material such as soft cloth that absorbs any physical shocks e Do not apply pressure to the cover of the drive e Do not touch the connector The drive is very sensitive Incorrect handling can cause damage and permanent loss of data Before removing the solid state drive make a backup copy of all the information on it and then turn the computer off Never remove the drive while the system is operating in sleep standby mode or in hibernation mode Replacement instructions To replace the solid state drive
49. are required after a product has been sold Lenovo or your reseller if authorized by Lenovo will make selected Engineering Changes ECs available that apply to your hardware The following items are not covered e Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or nonwarranted parts Note All warranted parts contain a 7 character identification in the format FRU XXXXXXX Identification of software problem sources Configuration of system BIOS UEFI BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade Changes modifications or upgrades to device drivers Installation and maintenance of network operating systems NOS Installation and maintenance of application programs For the terms and conditions of the Lenovo Limited Warranty that applies to your Lenovo hardware product see Warranty Information in the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer If possible be near your computer when you make your call in case the technical assistance representative needs to help you resolve a computer problem Please ensure that you have downloaded the most current drivers and system updates run diagnostics and recorded information before you call When calling for technical assistance please have the following information available e Machine Type and Model e Serial numbers of your computer monitor and other components or your proof of purchase e Description of the problem e Exact wording of any error messages e Hardwar
50. area sell the computer recycle the computer or put the computer in an operational state after all other methods of recovery have failed As a precautionary measure it is important to create recovery media as early as possible Note The recovery operations you can perform using recovery media vary depending on the operating system from which the recovery media were created The recovery media might contain a boot medium and a data medium Your Microsoft Windows license permits you to create only one data medium so it is important that you store the recovery media in a safe place after you have made them Copyright Lenovo 2011 107 Creating recovery media This section provides instructions on how to create recovery media on the Windows 7 operating system Note On the Windows 7 operating system you can create recovery media using discs or external USB storage devices On the Windows Vista and Windows XP operating systems you can create recovery media using only discs so this operation is also called creating Product Recovery discs To create recovery media on the Windows 7 operating system click Start gt All Programs gt Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools gt Factory Recovery Disks Then follow the instructions on the screen To create Product Recovery discs on the Windows Vista operating system click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Create Product Recovery Media Then follow the instructions on the screen To crea
51. be sure to follow the precautions Attention When you are handling a hard disk drive Chapter 6 Replacing devices 125 e Do not drop the drive or subject it to physical shocks Put the drive on a material such as soft cloth that absorbs any physical shocks e Do not apply pressure to the cover of the drive e Do not touch the connector The drive is very sensitive Incorrect handling can cause damage and permanent loss of data Before removing the hard disk drive make a backup copy of all the information on it and then turn the computer off Never remove the drive while the system is operating in sleep standby mode or in hibernation mode To replace the hard disk drive do as follows 1 Turn off the computer then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer 2 Close the computer display and turn the computer over 3 Remove the battery For details refer to the instructions in Remove the battery on page 116 4 Remove the screw that secures the slot cover E Then flip out the cover J and pull up to remove it El 5 Remove the hard disk drive by pulling out the tab 126 User Guide 6 Detach the side rubber rails from the hard disk drive 7 Attach the side rubber rails to a new hard disk drive 8 Insert the hard disk drive into the hard disk drive bay then press it firmly into place Chapter 6 Replacing devices 127 9 Insert the slot cover J Then slide in the cover
52. between the time your computer entered hibernation mode and the time it left this mode and your computer cannot resume normal operation Restore the system configuration to what it was before your computer entered hibernation mode If the memory size has been changed re create the hibernation file e Message Fan error Solution Cooling fan has failed Have the computer serviced Errors without messages e Problem My screen keeps blanking when do not want it to Solution You can disable any system timers such as the LCD turn off timer or the blank timer 1 Start Power Manager 2 Click the Power plan tab in Windows XP Power scheme and then select Maximum Performance from the predefined power plans in Windows XP Power scheme e Problem When turn on the machine nothing appears on the screen and the machine does not beep while starting up Note If you are not sure whether you heard any beeps turn off the computer by pressing and holding the power switch for 4 seconds or more Turn it on and listen again Solution Make sure that The battery is installed correctly The ac power adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet The computer is turned on Turn the power switch on again for confirmation If a power on password is set Press any key to display the prompt for the power on password If the brightness level of the screen is low
53. breaks and the internal fluid gets into your eyes or on your hands immediately wash the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes if any symptoms are present after washing get medical care Using headphones or earphones If your computer has both a headphone connector and an audio out connector always use the headphone connector for headphones also called a headset or earphones CAUTION Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss Adjustment of xiv User Guide the equalizer to maximum increases the earphones and headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level Excessive use of headphones or earphones for a long period of time at high volume can be dangerous if the output of the headphone or earphone connectors do not comply with specifications of EN 50332 2 The headphone output connector of your computer complies with EN 50332 2 Sub clause 7 This specification limits the computer s maximum wide band true RMS output voltage to 150 mV To help protect against hearing loss ensure that the headphones or earphones you use also comply with EN 50332 2 Clause 7 limits for a wide band characteristic voltage of 75 mV Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332 2 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels If your Lenovo computer came with headphones or earphones in the package as a set the combination of the headphones or earphones and the computer already comp
54. computer Do not use any pen other than the specified one or any metallic object because to do so might damage the touch panel or cause it to malfunction e If you put your computer in a carrying case put it into notebook mode and close the display Do not carry your computer in tablet mode e If you use both your finger or two fingers and the Tablet Digitizer Pen simultaneously for input to the screen only data entered by use of the Digitizer Pen will be processed e With the touch panel gradually a discrepancy may start to appear between the point you touch with your finger or two fingers during the finger point and its actual position on the screen To avoid this regularly correct the accuracy of the finger input by use of the touch panel Settings Utility e If your computer is the multitouch model the touch panel of your computer supports multitouch with which you can Pinch two fingers together or apart to zoom in or out on a document Scroll window contents by moving two fingers up and down left and right Touch two points on a digital photo and twist to rotate it just like a real photo Cleaning the touch panel display 1 To remove fingerprints etc from the touch panel display use a dry soft lint free cloth or a piece of absorbent cotton Do not apply solvents to the cloth 2 Gently wipe foreign particles and dust from the touch panel with one side of the cloth 3 Wipe smudges or fingerprints with the
55. computer display Locating wireless regulatory notices For more information about the wireless regulatory notices refer to the Regulatory Notice shipped with your computer If your computer is shipped without the Regulatory Notice you can find it on the Web site at http www lenovo com support To view the Regulatory Notice on the Web site do the following 1 Go to http www lenovo com support 2 Click the Support amp downloads section a new page is displayed 3 In the right pane type your computer number in the Enter a product number filed and click Go Appendix A Regulatory Information 245 4 You can then find the Regulatory Notice in the displayed search results Export classification notice This product is subject to the United States Export Administration Regulations EAR and has an Export Classification Control Number ECCN of 4A994 b It can be re exported except to any of the embargoed countries in the EAR E1 country list Electronic emission notices The following information refers to ThinkPad 4294 4296 4297 4298 4299 4300 4301 4286 4287 4289 4290 4291 4292 and 4293 Federal Communications Commission Declaration of Conformity This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This
56. computer is now attached to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 Note If the docking indicator is not lighted after you attach the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 your computer is not properly connected to the dock Check the ac power adapter of the dock or disconnect and re attach the ac power adapter Then attach your computer to the dock Notes e If you attach the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 to your computer but do not connect the ac power adapter of that attachment to the power jack your computer goes into battery mode Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer 167 e f your computer and the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 are connected to separate ac power adapters your computer goes into battery mode first and then shifts into ac mode e If in either of the two preceding situations the battery of your computer is detached or has no battery charge your computer shuts down Connecting an external display to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 Group 1 top figure and Group 2 lower figure are independent of each other Each has a DisplayPort and a digital visual interface If you connect a display to a DisplayPort and a DVI that are in the same group the DisplayPort is inactive Detaching a ThinkPad
57. computer may not respond when you try to resume using it Attention Before you start installing any of the following cards touch a metal table or a grounded metal object This action reduces any static electricity from your body The static electricity could damage the card e 54 mm wide ExpressCard e Flash media card such as an SD card an SDHC card an SDXC card and a MultiMediaCard e Smart card For information about the location of the ExpressCard slot flash media card reader slot and smart card slot see Locating computer controls connectors and indicators on page 1 To insert a 54 mm wide ExpressCard into the ExpressCard slot do the following 1 Make sure that the card is correctly oriented 2 Push the slot cover and insert the card into the slot with the notched edge facing upward Then press the card firmly into the connector To insert a flash media card into the 4 in 1 media card reader slot do the following 1 Make sure that the card is correctly oriented 2 Insert the card firmly into the 4 in 1 media card reader slot The card may stop before it is completely installed into the slot To insert a smart card into the smart card slot do the following 1 Make sure that the card is correctly oriented 2 Insert the card so that the metallic contact is up and goes in first Insert the card firmly into the slot If the ExpressCard flash media card or smart card is not Plug and Play do the following e For W
58. could damage the fingerprint reader or cause it not to work properly e Scratching the surface of the reader with a hard pointed object e Scraping the surface of the reader with your fingernail or anything hard e Using or touching the reader with a dirty finger If you notice any of the following conditions gently clean the surface of the reader with a dry soft lint free cloth e The surface of the reader is dirty or stained e The surface of the reader is wet e The reader often fails to enroll or authenticate your fingerprint If your finger has any of the following conditions you may not be able to register or authenticate it e Your finger is wrinkled e Your finger is rough dry or injured e Your finger is very dry e Your finger is stained with dirt mud or oil e The surface of your finger is very different from when you enrolled your fingerprint e Your finger is wet e A finger is used that has not been enrolled To improve the situation try the following e Clean or wipe your hands to remove any excess dirt or moisture from the fingers e Enroll and use a different finger for authentication e f your hands are too dry apply lotion to them Using a fingerprint reader in ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet Depending on the options you ordered your computer may have an integrated fingerprint reader By enrolling your fingerprint and associating it with a power on password a hard disk password or both pas
59. errors One short beep pause three short beeps pause three Make sure that memory modules are installed correctly If more short beeps and one short beep they are and you still hear the beeps have the computer serviced One long and two short beeps The video function has a problem Have the computer serviced Four cycles of four short beeps The Security Chip has a problem Have the computer serviced Five beeps The system board has a problem Have the computer serviced Memory problems Print these instructions now and keep it with your computer for reference later If your memory is not operating properly check the following items 1 Verify that the memory is installed and seated correctly in your computer It may be necessary to remove all added memories to test the computer with only the factory installed memories and then reinstall the memory one at a time to ensure a proper connection For the procedures to remove and reinstall a memory refer to Replacing memory on page 143 2 Check for error messages during startup Follow the appropriate corrective actions for Power on self test POST Error messages on page 209 3 Verify that the latest system BIOS UEFI BIOS for your model has been installed 4 Verify the proper memory configuration and compatibility including the maximum memory size and the memory speed For details refer to the instructions in Replacing memory on page 143 5 Run Leno
60. gives you good back support and seat height adjustment Use chair adjustments to best suit your desired posture Arm and Hand Position If available utilize chair arm rests or an area on your working surface to provide weight support for your arms Keep your forearms wrists and hands in a relaxed and neutral horizontal position Type with a soft touch without pounding the keys Leg Position Keep your thighs parallel to the floor and your feet flat on the floor or on a footrest What if you are traveling It may not be possible to observe the best ergonomic practices when you are using your computer while on the move or in a casual setting Regardless of the setting try to observe as many of the tips as possible Sitting properly and using adequate lighting for example will help you maintain desirable levels of comfort and performance Questions about vision ThinkPad notebook s visual display screens are designed to meet the highest standards and to provide you with clear crisp images and large bright displays that are easy to see yet easy on the eyes Of course any concentrated and sustained visual activity can be tiring If you have questions on eye fatigue or visual discomfort consult a vision care specialist for advice Adjusting your computer to fit you Because your computer enables you to work in so many places it is important that you remain attentive to good posture good lighting and proper seating Refer to the followi
61. in the drawing and slide the keyboard toward you Make sure that the edges of the keyboard marked in the drawing are under the frame Chapter 6 Replacing devices 121 4 Put the memory slot cover back in place close the cover and then tighten the screws 5 Reinstall the battery For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the battery on page 116 6 Turn the computer over again Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer then turn it on Replacing the palm rest Before you start print these instructions Prerequisites for the procedure Mooncen During electrical storms do not connect the cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet on the wall bancer Electric current from power telephone and communication cables is hazardous To avoid shock hazard disconnect the cables before opening the cover of this slot Replacement instructions 1 Turn off the computer then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer Wait for a few minutes till the inside of the computer cools before you start the following procedures 2 Close the computer display and turn the computer over 3 Remove the battery For more information refer to Replacing the battery 4 Remove the keyboard For more information about how to remove the keyboard refer to Replacing the keyboard 5 Remove the screws that secure the palm rest 122 User Guide 6 Turn the computer
62. is the same If you set a higher resolution for the computer display you can see only part of the screen at atime You can see other parts by moving the image with the TrackPoint or another pointing device You can move the display output to the computer display the external monitor or both in the Display Settings window in Windows XP Display Properties window Chapter 2 Using your computer 71 Connecting an external monitor To attach an external monitor do as follows For Windows 7 1 Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet 2 Turn on the external monitor 3 Change the display output location by pressing Fn F7 This allows you to switch between viewing output on the external display the computer display and both displays Note If your computer cannot detect the external monitor right click on the desktop then select Screen resolution Click the Detect button For Windows Vista 1 Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet 2 Turn on the external monitor 3 If this is the first time the external monitor has been connected the New Display Detected dialog box opens Select one of the following and then click OK e Duplicate my desktop on all displays mirrored e Show different parts of my desktop on each display extended e Show my desktop on the external monitor only Note If your computer ca
63. is turned on or after it resumes normal operation Solution The pointer might drift when you are not using the TrackPoint during normal operation This is a normal characteristic of the TrackPoint and is not a defect Pointer drifting might occur for several seconds under the following conditions When the computer is turned on When the computer resumes normal operation When the TrackPoint is pressed for a long time When the temperature changes e Problem The TrackPoint or touch pad does not work Solution Make sure that the TrackPoint or touch pad is set to Enabled in the UltraNav Device Setting Note To open the UltraNav Device Setting press Fn F8 Keyboard problems e Problem All or some keys on the keyboard do not work Solution If an external numeric keypad is connected 1 Turn off the computer 2 Remove the external numeric keypad 3 Turn on the computer and try using the keyboard again Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems 217 If the keyboard problem is resolved carefully reconnect the external numeric keypad external keyboard making sure that you have seated the connectors properly If the problem remains make sure that the correct device driver is installed For Windows 7 1 Click Start gt Control Panel Change the view of the Control Panel from Category to Large icons or Small icons 2 Click Keyboard 3 Select the Hardware tab In the Device Properties make sure that the Devi
64. models do not have a wireless WAN Bluetooth problems For Windows 7 and Windows Vista e Problem Sound does not come from the Bluetooth headset headphone but comes from the local speaker even though the headset headphone is connected using Headset profile or AV profile Solution Do the following 1 Exit the application that uses the sound device for example Windows Media Player Open the Control Panel by clicking Start gt Control Panel Click Hardware and Sound Sound Select the Playback tab If you are using Headset profile select Bluetooth Hands free Audio and click the Set Default button If you are using AV profile select Stereo Audio and click the Set Default button 6 Click OK to close the Sound window a A WwW N e Problem PIM Personal Information Manager items sent from Windows 7 and Windows Vista cannot be received correctly into the address book of any other Bluetooth enabled device Solution Windows 7 and Windows Vista send PIM items in XML format but most Bluetooth enabled devices handle PIM items in vCard format If another Bluetooth enabled device can receive a file through Bluetooth a PIM item sent from Windows 7 and Windows Vista might be saved as a file with the extension contact 214 User Guide For Windows XP Notes If you are using the Microsoft standard Bluetooth features and you want to access information about how to use the Bluetooth function do the following 1 Press Fn F5 t
65. necessary to download the latest drivers However you should download the latest driver for a component if you notice poor performance from that component or if you added a new component This may eliminate the driver as the potential cause of the problem Getting the latest drivers from the Web site You can download and install updated device drivers from the Lenovo Web site by doing the following 1 Connect to the Internet 2 Go to http www lenovo com support site wss document do sitestyle lenovo amp lndocid tpad matrix Enter the product number of the computer or click Detect my system on the screen 3 Click Downloads and drivers 4 Follow the directions on the screen and install the necessary software Getting the latest drivers using System Update The System Update program helps you keep the software on your system up to date Update packages are stored on Lenovo servers and can be downloaded from the Lenovo Support Web site Update packages can contain applications device drivers UEFI BIOS flashes or software updates When the System Update program connects to the Lenovo Support Web site the System Update program automatically recognizes the machine type and model of your computer the installed operating system and the language of the operating system to determine what updates are available for your computer The System Update program then displays a list of update packages and categorizes each update as critical recommende
66. not working Have the hard disk serviced Message 2102 Detection error on HDD2 Mini SATA Solution The Mini SATA device is not working Have the Mini SATA device serviced Message 2110 Read error on HDDO Main HDD Solution The hard disk is not working Have the hard disk serviced Message 2111 Read error on HDD1 Ultrabay HDD Solution The hard disk is not working Have the hard disk serviced Message 2112 Read error on HDD2 Mini SATA Solution The Mini SATA device is not working Have the Mini SATA device serviced Message 2200 Machine Type and Serial Number are invalid Solution Machine Type and Serial Number are invalid Have the computer serviced Message 2201 Machine UUID is invalid Solution Machine UUID is invalid Have the computer serviced Message The power on password prompt 210 User Guide Solution A power on password or a supervisor password is set Type the password and press Enter to use the computer refer to Using passwords on page 89 If the power on password is not accepted a supervisor password might have been set Type the supervisor password and press Enter If you still see the same error message have the computer serviced e Message The hard disk password prompt Solution A hard disk password is set Type the password and press Enter to use the computer refer to Hard disk passwords on page 91 e Message Hibernation error Solution The system configuration changed
67. of Access 3 Click Ease of Access Center For Windows XP 1 Click Start and then click Control Panel 2 Click Accessibility Options This help system supports the accessibility features provided by your Windows operating system screen readers designed to operate in the Windows environment and Windows keyboard navigation Fora complete listing of Microsoft Windows Keyboard Guide go to http www microsoft com enable Products altkeyboard aspx Screen reader technologies are primarily focused on software application interfaces help systems and a variety of online documents However in the case where a screen reader cannot read documents the document must first go through a conversion process One solution converts Adobe PDF files into a format that is read by the screen reader programs This solution is a Web based service provided by Adobe Systems Incorporated Through http access adobe com Adobe PDF documents can be converted to HTML or plain text in many languages One conversion options converts PDF documents on the Internet A second option enables users to submit the URL of an Adobe PDF file through e mail to convert it to HTML or ASCII text Adobe PDF files on a local hard disk drive local CD ROM or local area network LAN can also be converted by attaching the Adobe PDF file to an e mail message FullScreen Magnifier function Some models support the FullScreen Magnifier function which enlarges the active window and makes
68. off the computer display e Sleep standby in Windows XP In sleep standby mode your work is saved to memory and then the solid state drive or the hard disk drive and the computer display are turned off When your computer wakes up your work is restored within seconds To put your computer into sleep standby mode press Fn F4 To return from sleep standby mode press the Fn key e Hibernation By using this mode you can turn off your computer completely without saving files or exiting from any applications that are running When you enter hibernation all open applications folders and files are saved to the hard disk and then the computer turns off To enter hibernation press Fn F12 To resume your session press the power button for no more than 4 seconds When you are not using the wireless features such as Bluetooth or wireless LAN turn them off This will help conserve power To turn off the wireless features press Fn F5 Enabling the wakeup function If you put your computer into hibernation mode and the wakeup function is disabled this is the default setting the computer does not consume any power If the wakeup function is enabled it consumes a small amount of power To enable the function do as follows For Windows 7 and Windows Vista 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt System and Security in Windows Vista System and Maintenance 2 Click Administrative Tools 3 Click Task Scheduler If you are prompte
69. or 0800 000 702 Mandarin 1 800 060 066 Local number only 66 2273 4088 603 8315 6857 DID Thai and English 00800 4463 2041 Turkish 08705 500 900 Standard warranty support English 1 800 426 7378 English 000 411 005 6649 Spanish Table 10 World wide telephone list continued Country or Region Telephone Number Vietnam For Northern Area and Hanoi City 844 3 946 2000 or 844 3 942 6457 For Southern Area and Ho Chi Minh City 848 3 829 5160 or 844 3 942 6457 Vietnamese and English In all other countries and regions contact your Lenovo reseller or marketing representative or go to the Lenovo support Web site at http www lenovo com support Purchasing additional services During and after the warranty period you can purchase additional services such as support for Lenovo and non Lenovo hardware operating systems and application programs network setup and configuration upgraded or extended hardware repair services and custom installations Service availability and service name might vary by country For more information about these services go to http www lenovo com accessories services index html Chapter 11 Getting support 241 242 User Guide Appendix A Regulatory Information This appendix includes regulatory information for users Wireless related information Wireless interoperability Wireless LAN PCI Express Mini Card is designed to be interoperable with any
70. over and open the display Lift up the left and right top edges of the palm rest to remove it 7 Detach the flip lock ZIF connector I then remove the palm rest cable H 8 Lift up and remove the palm rest Chapter 6 Replacing devices 123 9 Release the palm rest from the computer Now the palm rest has been removed Installing the palm rest 1 Attach the palm rest making sure the latches near the top left and right edges of the palm rest are secure 2 Push the front side of the palm rest until it clicks into place 3 Attach the flip lock ZIF connector fj then push the palm rest cable H 124 User Guide 5 Reinstall the keyboard For more information about how to remove the keyboard refer to Replacing the keyboard 6 Reinstall the battery For more information refer to Replacing the battery 7 Turn the computer over again Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer then turn it on Replacing the hard disk drive Before you start print these instructions You can replace the hard disk drive with a new one which can be purchased from your Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative To replace the hard disk drive read the following prerequisites Note Replace the hard disk drive only if you upgrade it or have it repaired The connectors and slot of the hard disk drive were not designed for frequent changes or drive swapping Prerequisites for the procedure When replacing the drive
71. sure you install the Windows XP Service Pack 2 first You must install Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver before installing the operating system To install it you may need to attach a diskette drive to your computer If you have a diskette drive follow the procedure below Before installing the operating system install Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver as follows Note Be sure to install Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver before installing the operating system Otherwise your computer will not respond it will only display a blue screen 1 Attach a diskette drive to your computer 2 Copy Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver from C SWTOOLS DRIVERS IMSM to a diskette 3 To make sure that SATA AHCI is enabled start the ThinkPad Setup 4 Select Config 5 Select Serial ATA SATA 6 Select AHCI 7 Change the startup sequence of your computer Select Startup menu 8 Select UEFI Legacy Boot 9 Select Both or Legacy Only 10 Press F10 11 Insert the CD for Windows XP integrated with Service Pack 2 into the CD or DVD drive and restart the computer 12 To install a third party SCSI driver first press F6 13 When prompted select S for Specify Additional Device 14 When prompted insert the diskette that you created in step 2 and press Enter 15 Scroll the list of drivers If the SATA setting of you computer is set to AHCI select Intel Mobile Express Chipset SATA AHCI Controller 176 User Guide 16 To conti
72. system and the network System management Check the following topics to learn more about features of System Management e Desktop Management Interface e Preboot eXecution Environment e Wake on LAN e Resume on incoming call e Asset ID EEPROM Desktop Management Interface The system BIOS UEFI BIOS of your computer supports an interface called System Management BIOS Reference Specification GMBIOS V2 6 1 SMBIOS provides information about the hardware components of your system It is the responsibility of the BIOS to supply this database with information about itself and the devices on the system board This specification documents the standards for getting access to this BIOS information Preboot eXecution Environment Preboot eXecution Environment PXE technology makes your computer more manageable it is PXE 2 1 compliant by enabling it to boot load an operating system or another executable image from a server Your computer supports the PC functions that PXE requires For example with the appropriate LAN card your computer can be booted from the PXE server Note Remote Program Load RPL cannot be used with your computer Wake on LAN A network administrator can use Wake on LAN to turn on a computer from a management console When Wake on LAN is used with network management software many functions such as data transfer software updates and Flash BIOS updates can be performed remotely without remote attendance This u
73. that its temperature is at least 10 C 50 F Charging the battery When you check battery status and find that the percentage of power remaining is low or when the power alarm alerts you that remaining power is low you need to charge your battery or replace it with a charged battery If an ac outlet is convenient plug the ac power adapter into it and then insert the jack into the computer The battery will charge in about 3 to 6 hours This is affected by the battery size and the physical environment The battery status indicator will let you know that the battery is charging and will also notify you when the battery is fully charged Note To increase the life of the battery the computer does not start recharging the battery if the remaining power is greater than 95 Maximizing battery life To maximize the life of the battery do the following e Use the battery until the charge is completely depleted until the battery status indicator starts blinking orange e Recharge the battery completely before using it The battery is fully charged if the battery indicator shows green when the ac power adapter is plugged in e For a new battery or a battery that you have not used recently do one of the following 1 Recharge the battery completely before using it The battery is fully charged when the ac power adapter is plugged in and the battery indicator is green 2 Use the battery until the charge is completely depleted until the b
74. the monitor to an electrical outlet 2 Turn on the external monitor and the computer 3 Right click on the desktop and click Screen resolution Note If your computer cannot detect the external monitor click the Detect button 4 Click the icon for the desired monitor the Monitor 2 icon is for the external monitor 5 Click Advanced Settings 6 Click the Monitor tab Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type 11 is correct If it is click OK to close the window otherwise do as follows If more than one monitor type is displayed select Generic PnP Monitor or Generic Non PnP Monitor Click Properties If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation Click the Driver tab 10 Click Update Driver Click Browse my computer for driver software and then click Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems 221 12 13 14 15 16 For 1 N oO f 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 For 1 o N Oo f Clear the Show compatible hardware check box Select Manufacturer and Model for your monitor After updating the driver click Close Set Resolution Note To change the color settings select the Monitor tab then set Colors Click OK Windows Vista Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector and then connect the
75. to set up a new scheme To apply a presentation scheme you can also use the Fn F7 key combination To open Presentation Director click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Presentation Director Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model Presentation Director is not supported because the Windows 7 operating system handles the external displays instead Rescue and Recovery The Rescue and Recovery program is a one button recovery and restore solution that includes a set of self recovery tools to help you diagnose computer problems get help and recover from system crashes even if you cannot start the Windows operating system e For Windows 7 See Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 e For Windows Vista and Windows XP Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Rescue and Recovery System Update The System Update program helps you keep the software on your computer up to date by downloading and installing software packages ThinkVantage applications device drivers UEFI BIOS updates and other third party applications Some examples of software that you should keep updated are programs provided by Lenovo such as the Rescue and Recovery program To open the System Update do the following e For Windows 7 See Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 e For Windows Vista and Windows XP Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt System Update ThinkVantage GPS If the
76. to specify a wrong device during a copy a save or a format operation If you specify a wrong device your data and programs might be erased or overwritten Attention If you are using the BitLocker drive encryption you should not change the startup sequence BitLocker drive encryption detects the change of startup sequence and locks the computer from booting Changing the startup sequence Selecting the Startup to display the Boot submenu To change the startup sequence do the following 1 Select Boot then press Enter e You can use the Boot submenu to specify the startup sequence that runs when you turn on the power Refer to Boot submenu on page 184 e You can use the Network Boot to specify the top priority boot device that runs when Wake on LAN is commonly used by LAN administrators in corporate networks to get remote access to your computer Refer to Network Boot on page 185 2 Select the device you want to start first Use these keys to set the order that the UEFI BIOS will use when starting an operating system e or key moves the device up or down 3 Press F10 to save the changes and restart the system To change the startup sequence temporarily so that the system starts up from a different drive do the following 1 Turn off the computer 2 Turn on the computer then while the To interrupt normal startup press the blue ThinkVantage button message is displayed at the lower left of the screen press
77. while the computer is off or disconnected from the main power source If you want to replace it with a new one contact your place of purchase or ask for a repair service provided by Lenovo If you have replaced it by yourself and want to dispose of the disused lithium battery insulate it with vinyl tape contact your place of purchase and follow their instructions If you use a Lenovo computer at home and need to dispose of a lithium battery you must comply with local ordinances and regulations Disposing a disused battery pack from Lenovo notebook computers Your Lenovo notebook computer has a lithium ion battery pack or a nickel metal hydride battery pack If you are a company employee who uses a Lenovo notebook computer and need to dispose of a battery pack contact the proper person in Lenovo sales service or marketing and follow that person s instructions You also can refer to the instructions at www ibm com jp pc environment recycle battery If you use a Lenovo notebook computer at home and need to dispose of a battery pack you must comply with local ordinances and regulations You also can refer to the instructions at www ibm com jp pc environment recycle battery 250 User Guide Appendix C Notices Lenovo may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in all countries Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Any referen
78. wireless LAN product that is based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS Complementary Code Keying CCK and or Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM radio technology and is compliant to e The 802 11b g Standard 802 11a b g or 802 11n draft 2 0 on Wireless LANs as defined and approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers e The Wireless Fidelity WiFi certification as defined by the Wi Fi Alliance Bluetooth device is designed to be interoperable with any Bluetooth product that is compliant to Bluetooth Specification 2 1 EDR as defined by the Bluetooth SIG Following profiles are supported by Bluetooth device e Generic Access e Service Discovery e Serial Port e Dial up Networking e FAX e LAN Access using PPP e Personal Area Network e Generic Object Exchange e Generic Object Push e File Transfer e Synchronization e Audio Gateway e Headset e Printer e Human Interface Devices Keyboard Mouse e Basic Image e Handsfree e AV e Phone Book Access Profile PBAP Windows 7 and Windows Vista only e VDP Sync Profile Windows 7 and Windows Vista only Usage environment and your health Integrated wireless cards emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy like other radio devices However the level of energy emitted is far much less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for example mobile phones Copyright Lenovo 2011 243 Due to the fact that inte
79. you see a scratchlike mark on your display it might be a stain transferred from the keyboard or the TrackPoint pointing stick when the cover was pressed from the outside 2 Wipe or dust the stain gently with a soft dry cloth 3 If the stain remains moisten a soft lint free cloth with water or a 50 50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water that does not contain impurities 4 Wring out as much of the liquid as you can Chapter 9 Preventing problems 205 5 Wipe the display again do not let any liquid drip into the computer 6 Be sure to dry the display before closing it 206 User Guide Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems This chapter provides information on helping your solve computer problems e Diagnosing problems on page 207 e Troubleshooting on page 207 Diagnosing problems If you experience problems with your computer use the following procedure as a starting point for solving them Using Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox Note If your system is running and User Guide is accessible see User Guide If your computer is not operating properly you may be able to diagnose the problem by having Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox test components of your computer To start this program do as follows For Windows 7 1 Click Start 2 Move the pointer to Control Panel to System and Security and then to Lenovo System Health and Diagnostics For Windows Vista and XP 1 Click Start 2 Mo
80. your computer ThinkPad X220 and X220i rear view Figure 9 ThinkPad X220 and X220i rear view Power jack H Fan louvers rear Fa Power jack The ac power adapter cable connects to the computer power jack to provide power to the computer and charge the battery H Fan louvers rear The internal fan and louvers enable air to circulate in the computer and cool the central processor Note To avoid impeding airflow do not place any obstacle in front of the fan Chapter 1 Product Overview 17 ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet rear view Figure 10 ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet rear view Power jack H Fan louvers rear Power jack The ac power adapter cable connects to the computer power jack to provide power to the computer and charge the battery H Fan louvers rear The internal fan and louvers enable air to circulate in the computer and cool the central processor Note To avoid impeding airflow do not place any obstacle in front of the fan Status indicators Your computer has system status indicators and power status indicators The status indicators show the current status of your computer ThinkPad X220 and X220i status indicators Your computer has system status indicators and power status indicators The status indicators show the current status of your computer 18 User Guide Status indicators E Device Access A hard disk drive or an optional drive such as a drive in the Ultrabay
81. your fingerprint log on to the system as follows 1 Set a Power on password or a Hard disk security or both 2 Turn your computer off and then on again 3 When prompted swipe your finger over the reader 4 On request type your power on password your hard disk password or both The enrolled fingerprint is now associated with your power on password your hard disk password or both The next time you start the computer you can log on to the system by swiping your finger over the reader once Attention If you always use your fingerprint to log on to the system you may forget your password Write down your password and keep it in a safe place If you forget it and for some reason you cannot swipe your finger across the reader for example if you injure that finger you cannot start the computer or change the password If you forget your power on password you must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the password canceled f you forget your hard disk password Lenovo cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced Proof of purchase is required and a fee will be charged for parts and service Setting the fingerprint reader If you want to change the settings of the fingerprint reader follow the procedure below The fingerprint submenu under
82. 1 key The ThinkPad Setup opens The Installed memory item shows the total amount of memory installed in your computer Replacing the SIM card Before you start print these instructions Your computer may require a SIM Subscriber Identification Module card to establish a wireless WAN Wide Area Network connections Depending on the country of delivery the SIM card may be already installed in your computer or will be part of the shipping contents that came with your computer If you find the SIM cards included in the shipping contents a dummy card is installed in the SIM card slot Then proceed to the following instructions If you find the dummy card in the shipping contents the SIM card is already installed in the SIM card slot and no further installation is needed Note The SIM card is identified by the IC chip mounted on one side of the card To replace the SIM card do as follows 1 Turn off the computer then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer 2 Close the computer display and turn it over 3 Remove the battery For details refer to the instructions in Remove the battery on page 116 4 Find the SIM card slot inside the open battery compartment Remove the card 146 User Guide 5 Insert the SIM card firmly into the slot Note Make sure that you insert the SIM card all the way into the slot 6 Put the battery back in place For more details refer to Replacing the
83. 3 has a security keyhole for a mechanical lock By attaching a mechanical lock with cable there you can secure the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 to a heavy object such as a desk If you use the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 and attach a mechanical lock the eject button is also locked so that the computer cannot be detached from the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 If you use the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 and attach a mechanical lock the eject button is not locked To lock the eject button use the system lock key Lenovo does not offer a mechanical lock You will need to purchase one elsewhere You are responsible for evaluating selecting and implementing any locking device and security feature Lenovo makes no comments judgments or warranties about the function quality or performance of any locking device or security features Attach a mechanical lock to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 as follows 170 User Guide Attach a mechanical lock to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 as follows Attach a mechanical lock to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 as follows Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer 171 Using the system lock key The system lock key has two positions unlocked and locked Unlock When the key is in the locked position the eject button of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3
84. 6 236 241 243 243 244 245 246 246 246 246 247 247 248 248 248 248 248 249 249 249 251 252 iv User Guide Read this first Be sure to follow the important tips given here to continue to get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer Failure to do so might lead to discomfort or injury or cause your computer to fail When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging the base the palm rest and some other parts may become hot The temperature they reach depends on the amount of system activity and the level of charge in the battery Extended contact with your body even through clothing could cause discomfort or even a skin burn e Avoid keeping your hands your lap or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended time e Periodically take hands from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer it generates heat Extended contact with your body even through clothing may cause a skin burn e To avoid spills and the danger of electrical shock keep liquids away from your computer e Never use it to warm your body e To avoid spills and the danger of electrical shock keep liquids away from your computer Applying strong force to cables may damage or break them e Route communication lines or the cables of an ac power adapter a m
85. AN and WiMAX combo antenna Auxiliary The auxiliary antenna connected to the wireless LAN or WiMAX feature is located on the upper left side of the computer display near the center 2 Wireless LAN third Wireless LAN WiMAX main and Wireless WAN main The main antenna connected to the wireless LAN or WiMAX feature is located on the upper right side of the computer display near the center If your computer has the Multiple Input Multiple Output MIMO wireless LAN feature the third wireless antenna is also located here 244 User Guide ThinkPad 220 Tablet and X220i Tablet If your computer comes with a wireless WAN feature its auxiliary antenna is located at the top left side of the computer display 2 Wireless LAN and WiMAX combo antenna Auxiliary The auxiliary antenna connected to the wireless LAN or WiMAX feature is located at the top left portion of the computer display near the center 3 Wireless LAN antenna Third If your computer has the Multiple Input Multiple Output MIMO wireless LAN feature the third wireless antenna is located at the top center portion of the computer display 4 Wireless LAN and WiMAX combo antenna Main The main antenna connected to the wireless LAN or WiMAX feature is located at the top right side of the computer display near the center 5 Wireless WAN antenna Main If your computer comes with a wireless WAN feature its main antenna is located at the top right side of the
86. ATA solid state drive or subject it to physical shocks Put the mSATA solid state drive on a material such as soft cloth that absorbs any physical shocks e Do not apply pressure to the cover of the mSATA solid state drive The mSATA solid state drive is very sensitive Incorrect handling can cause damage and permanent loss of data Before removing the mSATA solid state drive make a backup copy of all the information on it and then turn the computer off Never remove the mSATA solid state drive while the system is operating in sleep standby mode or in hibernation mode Chapter 6 Replacing devices 141 If an mSATA solid state drive is available in your computer to replace the mSATA solid state drive do as follows 1 OOA Ww PY Turn off the computer then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer Wait for a few minutes till the inside of the computer cools before you start the following procedures Close the computer display and turn the computer over Remove the battery For details refer to the instructions in Remove the battery on page 116 Remove the keyboard For details refer to the instructions in Replacing the keyboard on page 118 Remove the palm rest For details refer to the instructions in Remove the palm rest on page 122 Remove the screw The card pops up 7 Remove the card 142 User Guide 8 Align the contact edge of a new mSATA solid stat
87. Behavior of the UltraNav and an mal mouse Adding the UltraNav i icon to iie systa tay i Power management Checking battery status Using the ac power adapter Charging the battery Maximizing battery life Managing your battery power Power saving modes Handling the battery Connecting to the network Ethernet connections Wireless connections Using a projector or external display Changing display settings ar Connecting a projector or external display Setting up a presentation Using dual displays Using audio features Using an integrated camera Using the ThinkLight feature Using the media card reader Inserting an ExpressCard a flash media card or a smart card Removing an ExpressCard a flash meda card or a smart card Chapter 3 You and your computer Accessibility and comfort 39 39 41 41 43 44 45 46 46 47 47 49 52 53 54 54 56 57 57 58 58 58 59 59 59 59 61 62 62 62 70 70 71 75 76 77 78 79 79 80 81 83 83 Ergonomic information sg Adjusting your computer to fit you Accessibility information FullScreen Magnifier function Traveling with your computer Travel tips Travel accessories Chapter 4 Security Attaching a mechanical lock Using passwords f i Passwords and sleep istandbys meda Typing passwords Power on password Hard disk passwords Supervisor password Hard disk security Setting the security chip Usin
88. Can I get my user guide in another language e To download the user guide in another language go to http Awww lenovo com support Then follow the instructions on the screen Copyright Lenovo 2011 39 On the go and need to use battery power more effectively e To conserve power or to suspend operation without exiting applications or saving files see the explanation about power saving modes on page 59 e To achieve the best balance between performance and power saving create and apply power plans in Windows XP power schemes by use of Power Manager e f your computer will be turned off for an extended period of time you can prevent battery power from draining by removing the battery Look for more information about using the battery in Power management on page 58 Concerned about security or need to securely dispose of data stored on your hard disk or solid state drive e Study the Chapter 4 Security on page 89 section to find out how you can protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use e The Client Security Solution preinstalled on your computer performs many of the security tasks that help protect it If the setup wizard runs to keep your secure be sure to set up the Client Security Solution Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model Client Security Solution is not preinstalled on it e Before you dispose of the data on the hard disk drive or the solid state drive be sure to read Notice on
89. Card slot E Wireless radio switch EB USB connectors left E DisplayPort connector H Monitor connector i USB connector Fan louvers left ExpressCard slot Your computer has an ExpressCard slot for a 54 mm wide card For details refer to the instructions in Using an ExpressCard a smart card or a flash media Card on page 79 H Wireless radio switch You can quickly turn the wireless features of your computer on and off using this switch EJ USB connectors left The Universal Serial Bus connectors are used for connecting devices compatible with a USB interface such as a printer or a digital camera Note Your computer is compatible with USB 1 1 and 2 0 When you attach a USB cable to the connector make sure that the mark is to the upper side Otherwise the connector might be damaged Eq DisplayPort connector Your computer supports the DisplayPort a next generation digital display interface that connects a compatible projector external monitor or HDTV to your computer 14 User Guide H Monitor connector You can attach an external monitor or a projector to your computer to display computer information Note If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 and use a monitor connector use the monitor connector on the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 not the one on the computer For details refer to the instructions in Attaching an external monitor on page 71 i USB connector The Universa
90. Chapter 5 Recovery overview 113 114 User Guide Chapter 6 Replacing devices You can increase the capacity of the memory or the hard disk drive by replacing the original built in device with an optional one Or if you need to you can replace the PCI Express Mini Card by following the procedures in this section e Static electricity prevention on page 115 e Replacing the battery on page 116 e Replacing the hard disk drive on page 125 e Replacing the keyboard on page 118 e Replacing memory on page 143 e Installing and replacing the mSATA solid state drive on page 141 e Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN WiMAX connection on page 131 e Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless WAN connection on page 137 e Replacing the SIM card on page 146 e Replacing the solid state drive on page 128 Static electricity prevention Static electricity although harmless to you can seriously damage computer components and options Improper handling of static sensitive parts can cause damage to the part When you unpack an option or CRU do not open the static protective package containing the part until the instructions direct you to install it When you handle options or CRUs or perform any work inside the computer take the following precautions to avoid static electricity damage e Limit your movement Movement can cause stat
91. China SC Denmark DK Finland FI France FR Germany GR Italy IT Japan JP Netherlands NL Netherlands NL Norway NO Spain SP Sweden SV Taiwan and Hong Kong TC United States US Installing Windows 7 Before you start print these instructions To install Windows 7 and its related software on your computer do as follows 1 Start the ThinkPad Setup 2 Select Startup menu 3 Select UEFI Legacy Boot 4 Do one of the following e lf you want to install the Windows 7 32 bit operating system select Legacy Only or Both e f you want to install the Windows 7 64 bit operating system in Legacy mode select Legacy Only e If you want to install the Windows 7 64 bit operating system in UEFI mode select UEFI Only 5 Press F10 6 To install Windows 7 insert the DVD for Windows 7 into the DVD drive and install Windows 7 from the DVD Then restart the computer and follow the instructions on the screen 7 Install the Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 To do this refer to Installing Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 on page 180 8 Install device drivers To do this refer to Installing drivers and software on page 181 Installing Registry Patches for Windows 7 Install the following Registry Patches e Registry patch enabling Wake Up on LAN from Standby for Energy Star e Fix for Issue of HDD with HD Detection To install these Registry Patches go to http www le
92. Connections on line help Using a projector or external display Your computer comes with many features to increase the enjoyment of your computer and help you give presentations with confidence Changing display settings You can change the display settings such as font size or color mode or numeric lock Font size To make a font size larger do as follows For Windows 7 1 Right click on the desktop and click Personalize 2 Click Display at the left 3 Select the Medium or Larger radio button 4 Click Apply The change will take effect after you log off For Windows Vista 1 Right click on the desktop and click Personalize 2 Click Adjust font size DPI under Tasks at the left If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation 3 Select the Larger scale 120DPI make text more readable check box 4 Click OK The change will take effect after the computer restarts You are prompted to restart the computer after you click OK or Apply For Windows XP 1 Right click on the desktop and click Properties The Display Properties window opens 2 Click the Appearance tab 70 User Guide 3 Under Font Size click Large Fonts or Extra Large Fonts 4 Click Apply to apply the settings 5 Click OK If you are prompted to restart the computer after you click OK or Apply the change will take effect after the computer restarts Numeric lock To change th
93. Hyper Threading e Disabled Enable or disable additional Technology e Enabled logical processors within a processor core Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 191 Table 6 Config menu items continued Intel AMT Intel AMT Control e Disabled e Enabled CIRA Timeout Console Type e PC ANSI e VT100 e VT UTF8 Security menu items Table 7 Security menu items If you select Enabled Intel AMT Active Management Technology is configured and additional setup items are provided in MEBx Management Engine BIOS Extension Setup Note You can enter MEBx Setup menu by pressing Ctrl P key combination in Startup Interrupt Menu To display the Startup Interrupt Menu press ThinkVantage button or Enter key during POST Set timeout option for CIRA connection to be established 1 though 254 seconds are selectable If you select O use 60 seconds as default timeout value If you select 255 waiting time for establishing a connection is unlimited Select the console type for AMT Note This console type should match the Intel AMT remote console a a Fingerprint Predesktop Authentication Disabled Enabled Reader Priority External gt Internal Internal Only 192 User Guide Refer to Security menu on page 183 and Using passwords on page 89 Enable or disable fingerprint authentication before the operating system is loaded If External gt Internal is selected an ext
94. I Legacy Boot 4 Do one of the following e f you want to install the Windows Vista 32 bit operating system select Legacy Only or Both e If you want to install the Windows Vista 64 bit operating system in Legacy mode select Legacy Only e If you want to install the Windows Vista 64 bit operating system in UEFI mode select UEFI Only 5 Press F10 6 Insert the DVD for Windows Vista integrated with Service Pack 1 into the DVD drive and restart the computer 7 Complete the installation of Windows Vista Service Pack 1 by following OS installing instructions 8 Install the Windows Vista Service Pack 2 You can install the Windows Vista Service Pack 2 using the Windows Vista Service Pack 2 Installation CD or download it from either Microsoft Download Center or Microsoft Windows update Web site 9 Install the Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 To do this refer to Installing Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 on page 180 10 Install device drivers To do this refer to Installing drivers and software on page 181 Installing Registry Patches for Windows Vista Install the following Registry Patches e Registry Patch enabling Device Initiated Power Management on SATA e Registry Patch enabling USB S3 Power Management e Registry patch to change IDLE IRP timing by Fingerprint reader e Registry patch enabling Wake Up on LAN from Standby for Energy Star e Registry patch to improve USB device detec
95. Macau Cantonese English and Mandarin Colombia 1 800 912 3021 Spanish Costa Rica 0 800 011 1029 Spanish Croatia 0800 0426 Czech Czech Republic 0 Czech Republic 420272131316 S 2 7213 1316 Denmark 7010 5150 oam o oou service and support Danish Dominican Republic Dominican Republic 1 866 1 866 434 2080 Spanish s 2080 1 866 434 2080 Spanish s Egypt 202 35362525 El Salvador 800 6264 Spanish Estonia 372 66 00 800 372 6776793 Finland 358 800 1 4260 Warranty service and support Finnish France Hardware 0810 631 213 Warranty service and support Software 0810 631 020 Warranty service and support French 238 User Guide Table 10 World wide telephone list continued Country or Region Telephone Number Honduras Tegucigalpa 232 4222 San Pedro Sula 552 2234 Spanish Hungary 36 1 3825716 36 1 3825720 English and Hungarian India 1800 425 2666 or 91 80 2535 9182 English Indonesia 021 5238 823 001 803 606 282 Local number only 603 8315 6859 DID English and Bahasa Indonesian Ireland 01 881 1444 Warranty service and support English Israel Givat Shmuel Service Center 972 3 531 3900 Hebrew and English Italy 39 800 820094 Warranty service and support Italian Japan ThinkPad Products Toll Free 0120 20 5550 International 81 46 266 4716 Japanese and English The above numbers will be answered with a Japanese language voice prompt For telephon
96. N select either Enabled or Disabled 4 Press F10 200 User Guide Chapter 9 Preventing problems An important part of owning a ThinkPad notebook is maintenance With proper care you can avoid common problems The following sections provide information that can help you to keep your computer running smoothly e General tips for preventing problems on page 201 e Making sure device drivers are current on page 202 e Taking care of your computer on page 203 General tips for preventing problems 1 Check the capacity of your hard disk drive from time to time If the hard disk drive gets too full Windows will slow down and might produce errors Note In Windows 7 and Windows Vista click Start gt Computer In Windows XP click Start gt My Computer 2 Empty your recycle bin on a regular basis 3 Use disk defragment tool regularly on your hard disk drive to improve data seek and read times 4 To free up disk space uninstall unused application programs Note You might also want to look for application program duplication or overlapping versions 5 Clean out your Inbox Sent and Trash folders from your e mail client program 6 At least once a week make a point to back up your data If critical data is present it is a good idea to perform a daily backup Lenovo has many backup options available for your computer Rewritable optical drives are available for most machines and are easily installed 7 Use or
97. Port Replicator Series 3 a ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or a ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 disconnect an ac power adapter from the computer e f your computer is operating make sure that it has finished any operations involving devices that are connected to a USB connector and a USB eSATA connector Also make sure that any connection to an Ethernet port has ended e Before you attach your computer to a ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or a ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 make sure that the system lock key is in place and in the unlocked horizontal position 1 To attach your computer make sure that the system lock key is in place and in the unlocked horizontal position for the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 Make sure that the mechanical lock is detached for the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 166 User Guide 2 Press the button of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 Pull the sliding adjuster in the direction shown by the arrow H 3 Put your computer on the platform of the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 making sure that the top left corner of the computer is aligned to the guide plate on the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 4 4 Insert your computer into the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 along the surface until you hear a click The
98. Resolution and Colors in the Display Settings window Click OK For Windows XP 1 NO oO fF W PY 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet Turn on the external monitor and the computer Press Fn F7 to change the display output location to the external monitor Right click on the desktop and click Properties to open the Display Properties window Click the Settings tab Click Advanced Click the Monitor tab Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type is correct If it is click OK to close the window otherwise do as follows If more than two monitor types are displayed select Default Monitor Click Properties Click the Driver tab Click Update Driver The Hardware Update Wizard appears Click No not this time and then click Next Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and then click Next Select Don t search will choose the driver to install and then click Next Clear the Show compatible hardware check box Select Manufacturer and Model for your monitor If you cannot find your monitor in the list stop the installation of this driver and use the driver shipped with your monitor After updating the driver click OK to close the Properties window Set Colors and Screen area in the Display Properties window Click OK Consider
99. SB Enable or disable USB related functions e Keyboard Mouse Set the keyboard and the mouse related functions e Display Specify the settings for display output e Power Set power management related functions e Beep and Alarm Enable or disable the audio related functions e Serial ATA SATA Specify the settings for the hard disk drive e CPU Specify the settings for the CPU e Intel AMT Set the Intel AMT related functions Date and time menu If you need to set the current date and time of your computer select Date Time from the ThinkPad Setup menu The following submenu is displayed e System Date e System Time To change the date and time do the following 1 Using the up and down arrow keys select the item to change date or time 2 Press Tab Shift Tab or Enter to select a field 3 Type the date or time Note Another way to adjust date and time is press the or key 182 User Guide Security menu If you need to set the security features of your computer select Security from the ThinkPad Setup menu Notes e The default settings are already optimized for you If you consider changing the computer configuration proceed with extreme caution Setting the configuration incorrectly might cause unexpected results e In each submenu you can enable a function by selecting Enabled or disable it by selecting Disabled The following submenu is displayed e Password Set a password related functions e Fin
100. Select the optical drive with the boot disc as the startup device and press Enter After a short delay the Rescue and Recovery workspace opens 4 On the Rescue and Recovery menu click Restore your system 5 Follow the instructions on the screen Insert the appropriate Product Recovery disc when prompted Performing backup and recovery operations The Rescue and Recovery program enables you to back up all your hard disk drive contents including the operating system data files software programs and personal settings You can designate where the Rescue and Recovery program stores the backup e Ina protected area of your hard disk drive e On the secondary hard disk drive if a secondary hard disk drive is installed in your computer e On an attached external USB hard disk drive e On a network drive e On recordable discs a recordable optical drive is required for this option After you have backed up the contents on the hard disk drive you can restore the complete contents of the hard disk drive restore only the selected files or restore only the Windows operating system and applications Performing a backup operation This section provides instructions on how to perform a backup operation using the Rescue and Recovery program on different operating systems e To perform a backup operation using the Rescue and Recovery program on the Windows 7 operating system do the following 1 From the Windows desktop click Start gt All Pr
101. TPM is defined as a V1 2 TPM To check the BitLocker status do the following e For Windows 7 Click Start gt Control Panel gt System and Security gt BitLocker Drive Encryption e For Windows Vista Click Start gt Control Panel gt Security gt BitLocker Drive Encryption Chapter 4 Security 95 For details about Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption go to the Help and Support for Windows 7 or Windows Vista or search for Microsoft Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption Step by Step Guide on Microsoft web site Disk Encryption hard disk drive and Encryption solid state drive Some models contain the Disk Encryption hard disk drive or Encryption solid state drive This feature helps to protect your computer against security attacks on media NAND flash or device controllers by use of a hardware encryption chip For the efficient use of the encryption feature be sure to set a Hard disk passwords for the internal storage device Setting the security chip Strict security requirements are imposed on network client computers that transfer confidential information electronically Depending on the options you ordered your computer might have an embedded security chip a cryptographic microprocessor With the security chip and Client Security Solution you can do the following e Protect your data and system e Strengthen access controls e Secure communications Setting the Security Chip The choices offered in the Security Chip su
102. ThinkPad User Guide ThinkPad X220 X220i X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet Notes Before using this information and the product it supports be sure to read the following e Safety and Warranty Guide e Regulatory Notice e Important safety information on page vi e Appendix C Notices on page 251 The Safety and Warranty Guide and the Regulatory Notice have been uploaded on the Web site To refer to them go to http www lenovo com support and then click User Guides amp Manuals First Edition April 2011 Copyright Lenovo 2011 LENOVO products data computer software and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and are sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C F R 2 101 with limited and restricted rights to use reproduction and disclosure LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE If products data computer software or services are delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract use reproduction or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No GS 35F 05925 Contents Read this first Important safety information fog as Conditions that require immediate action Safety guidelines Chapter 1 Product Overview Locating computer controls connectors and indicators i n Front view Right side view Left side view Bottom view Rear view Status indicators Locating important product ifonnations Machine ty
103. ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 ThinkPad 3 Make sure that the guides of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 align with the holes of the computer Then put the computer in place The docking indicator lights A Ai 152 User Guide 4 When the computer is already docked to the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 you can start the computer Note You can turn the key clockwise to lock it Then keep the security key in a safe place Do not lose this key otherwise you will be unable to detach the computer from the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 Detaching a ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 Attention Do not detach your computer from the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 while the docking indicator of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 is blinking or on Wait until the docking indicator turns off Detaching while the indicator is blinking or on causes the system to beep and the computer may halt You can hot detach or warm detach the computer from the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 Hot detach is detaching the computer from the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 while in operating mode warm detach is detaching the computer from the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 while in sleep standby mode To perform a hot detach follow the steps below For Windows 7 and Windows Vista 1 Click Start and then press the right arrow button 2 Select Undock 3 Make sure that the docking indicator of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 is off For Windows XP 1 Select the Undock
104. ThinkPad features that can help make your computer more comfortable to use 84 User Guide Accessibility information Lenovo is committed to providing people with disabilities greater access to information and technology As a result the following information provides ways to help users that have hearing vision and mobility limitations get the most out of their computer experience Assistive technologies enable users to access information in the most appropriate way Some of these technologies are already provided in your operating system others can be purchased through vendors or accessed through the World Wide Web Assistive technologies Some accessibility technologies are available through the Accessibility Options program Depending on your operating system the number of accessibility options available varies In general accessibility options enhance the way users with hearing vision or mobility limitations navigate and use their computer For example some users might not have the fine motor skills required to use a mouse or select key combinations Other users might require larger fonts or high contrast display modes In some cases magnifiers and built in speech synthesizers are available For detailed information about each of these features consult the Microsoft help system To use the Accessibility Options program do as follows For Windows 7 and Windows Vista 1 Click Start and then click Control Panel 2 Click Ease
105. This solution is available even if you did not back up your files or if changes were made to the files since your last backup operation You can also rescue individual files from a Rescue and Recovery backup located on your local hard disk drive a USB device or a network drive e Restore your hard disk drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup If you have backed up your hard disk drive using the Rescue and Recovery program you can restore the hard disk drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup even if you cannot start the Windows operating system e Restore your hard disk drive to the factory default settings The Rescue and Recovery workspace enables you to restore the complete contents of your hard disk drive to the factory default settings If you have multiple partitions on your hard disk drive you have the option to restore the factory default settings to the C partition and leave the other partitions intact Because the Rescue and Recovery workspace operates independently from the Windows operating system you can restore the factory default settings even if you cannot start the Windows operating system Attention If you restore the hard disk drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup or restore the hard disk drive to the factory default settings all files on the primary hard disk drive partition usually drive C will be deleted in the recovery process If possible make copies of important files If you are unable to start the Windows operating s
106. When your computer connects to a LAN and a session with the network is available the upper right indicator is solid green While data is being transmitted the upper left indicator blinks yellow For details refer to the instructions in Access Connections on page 34 Note If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 and use an Ethernet connector use the Ethernet connector on the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 not the one on the computer Always On USB connector The Universal Serial Bus connectors are used for connecting devices compatible with a USB interface such as a printer or a digital camera By default even if your computer is in sleep standby mode the Always On USB connector still enables you to charge some devices such as iPod iPhone and BlackBerry smartphones by attaching the devices to the connector However with the ac power adapter attached if you want to charge these devices when your computer is in hibernation mode or powered off you will need to open the Power Manager program and configure corresponding settings to enable the Always On USB connector function For details about how to enable the Always On USB connector function refer to the on line help of the Power Manager program Note Yo
107. a moment before the image appears Right click on the desktop and click Properties to open the Display Properties window Click the Settings tab Click Advanced Click the Monitor tab Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type is correct If it is click OK to close the window otherwise do as follows 222 User Guide 8 If more than one monitor type is displayed select Default Monitor 9 Click Properties 10 Click the Driver tab 11 Click Update Driver The Hardware Update Wizard appears 12 Click No not this time and then click Next 13 Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and then click Next 14 Select Don t search will choose the driver to install and then click Next 15 Clear the Show compatible hardware check box 16 Select Manufacturers and Models for your monitor 17 After updating the driver click OK to close the Properties window 18 Set Colors and Screen area in the Display Properties window 19 Click OK e Problem The screen is unreadable or distorted Solution Make sure that the monitor information is correct Refer to the Solution for setting a higher resolution on the external monitor Make sure that the appropriate monitor type is selected Refer to the Solution for setting a higher resolution on the external monitor Make sure that an appropriate refresh rate is selected by doing the following For Windows 7 1 Conn
108. a network Bluetooth can connect devices a short distance from one another and is commonly used for connecting peripheral devices to a computer transferring data between hand held devices and PC or remotely controlling and communicating with devices such as mobile phones WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access This long range wireless data transmission technology based on the 802 16 standard is expected to provide the user a last mile broadband connectivity similar to that provided by cable or ADSL but without the need to physically connect a cable to the PC Making wireless LAN connections Your computer comes with a built in wireless networking card and a configuration utility to help you make wireless connections and monitor the status of your connection so that you can stay connected to your network while you are in the office in a meeting room or at home with no need for a wired connection Attention e If you carry your computer with the wireless LAN feature into an airplane check the services with the airline before boarding the airplane e lf there are restrictions on the use of computers on an airplane with the wireless feature you need to disable it before boarding To disable it refer to the instructions in Enabling or disabling the wireless feature on page 70 Note You can purchase a wireless networking card as an option For more information refer to Finding ThinkPad options on pag
109. abled and configured correctly Conexant CX20672 SmartAudio HD e Problem Recordings made by using the Microphone input are not loud enough Solution Make sure that Microphone Boost is turned on and set as follows For Windows 7 and Windows Vista 1 Click Hardware and Sound Click Sound Click the Recording tab in the Sound window NO OO fF W PY Click Start gt Control Panel Select Microphone and click the Properties button Click the Levels tab and move the Microphone Boost slider upwards Click OK For Windows XP O AN DOA RAON Double click the volume icon in the task bar The Volume Control window opens Click Options Click Properties Select Conexant HD Audio input in the Mixer device list Click OK Click Options and then click Advanced Controls Find the Microphone volume control and then click Advanced Select the Microphone boost check box Click Close Note For details about controlling volume refer to your Windows online help e Problem A volume or balance slider cannot be moved 226 User Guide Solution The slider might be grayed out This means that its position is fixed by the hardware and cannot be changed Problem The volume sliders do not stay in place when some audio applications are used Solution It is normal for the sliders to change position when certain sound applications are used The applications are aware of the Volume Mixer windo
110. al special handling may apply Go to http www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate xii User Guide Heat and product ventilation ancer Computers ac power adapters and many accessories can generate heat when turned on and when batteries are charging notebook computers can generate a significant amount of heat due to their compact size Always follow these basic precautions When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging the base the palm rest and some other parts may become hot Avoid keeping your hands your lap or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended length of time When you use the keyboard avoid keeping your palms on the palm rest for a prolonged period of time Your computer generates some heat during normal operation The amount of heat depends on the amount of system activity and the battery charge level Extended contact with your body even through clothing could cause discomfort or even a skin burn Periodically take breaks from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest and be careful not to use the keyboard for any extended length of time Do not operate your computer or charge the battery near flammable materials or in explosive environments Ventilation slots fans and or heat sinks are provided with the product for safety comfort and reliable operation These features might inadvertently become blocked by placing the product on
111. and using a rescue medium on page 111 e Reinstalling preinstalled applications and device drivers on page 112 e Solving recovery problems on page 113 Notes 1 There are a variety of methods to choose from when considering how to recover in the event of a software or hardware related problem Some methods vary depending on the type of your operating system 2 The product on the recovery media may be used only for the following purposes e Restore the product preinstalled on your computer e Reinstall the product e Modify the product using the Additional Files Notes To prevent potential performance risks or unexpected behavior that might be caused by the new hard disk drive technology it is recommended that you use one of the following back up software programs e ThinkVantage Rescue and Recovery version 4 23 or later for Windows XP and Windows Vista 4 3 or later for Windows 7 e Symantec Norton Ghost version 15 or later Notes To use this program do the following 1 Click Start gt Run The Run window opens 2 Type cmd in the field Then click OK 3 Type ghost align 1mb and press Enter e Acronis True Image 2010 or later e Paragon Backup amp Recovery 10 Suit or later Paragon Backup amp Recovery 10 Home or later Creating and using recovery media You can use recovery media to restore the hard disk drive to the factory default settings Recovery media are useful if you transfer the computer to another
112. ard e SDHC card e SDXC card e MultiMediaCard Chapter 1 Product Overview 11 Note Your computer does not support the CPRM feature for SD card For details refer to the instructions in Using an ExpressCard a smart card or a flash media card on page 79 Left side view This section provides left side view for your computer ThinkPad X220 and X220i left side view Fa Tmn yA x a 4 2 Figure 5 Left side view ExpressCard slot H Wireless radio switch EB USB connector left E DisplayPort connector H Monitor connector i USB connector Fan louvers left ExpressCard slot Your computer has an ExpressCard slot for a 54 mm wide card For details refer to the instructions in Using an ExpressCard a smart card or a flash media Card on page 79 H Wireless radio switch You can quickly turn the wireless features of your computer on and off using this switch EJ USB connector left The Universal Serial Bus connector is used for connecting devices compatible with a USB interface such as a printer or a digital camera 12 User Guide Note Your computer is compatible with USB 1 1 and 2 0 When you attach a USB cable to the connector make sure that the mark is to the upper side Otherwise the connector might be damaged Eq DisplayPort connector Your computer supports the DisplayPort a next generation digital display interface that connects a compatible projector external monitor or HDTV t
113. ard disk password If you want to enter a master hard disk password do the following 1 1 Press F1 The icon changes to this DAR 2 Now type the master hard disk password Note To return to the first icon press F1 again A aala If this icon appears enter the Supervisor password Note You can press Backspace if you press a wrong key while you are typing your password Power on password You can set a power on password to help protect your computer against access by unauthorized users If you set a power on password the password prompt appears on the screen whenever you turn on the computer You must enter the correct password to start using the computer Setting a power on password 1 Print these instructions Save all open files and exit all applications Turn your computer off and then turn it on again When the logo screen is displayed press F1 The ThinkPad Setup opens Select Security using the cursor directional keys to move down the menu Select Password Select Power on Password ON DOF W PD Choose your power on password and type it within the brackets on theEnter New Password field Note You can set the minimum length of a power on password in the ThinkPad Setup menu For details refer to Security menu on page 183 9 Press Enter once to move to the next line Retype the password you just entered to verify it 10 Commit your password to memory and press Enter A Setup Notice windo
114. ardware and Sound Communications Utility Hardware and Sound Lenovo Web Conferencing Fingerprint Software System and Security Lenovo Fingerprint Reader Hardware and Sound or Lenovo notebook Fingerprint Reader Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox System and Security Lenovo System Health and Diagnostics Mobile Broadband Activate Network and Internet Lenovo 3G Mobile Broadband Password Manager System and Security Lenovo Password Vault Pome ceca say Power Manager Hardware and Sound Lenovo Power Controls pen eee eee Recovery Media System and Security Lenovo Factory Recovery Disks System Update System and Security Lenovo Update and Drivers Rescue and Recovery System and Security Lenovo Enhanced Backup and Restore ThinkVantage GPS Network and Internet Lenovo GPS System and Security Note Some applications might not be available in your system Access Connections Access Connections is a connectivity assistant program for creating and managing location profiles Each location profile stores all the network and Internet configuration settings needed for connecting to a network infrastructure from a specific location such as a home or an office By switching between location profiles as you move your computer from place to place you can quickly and easily connect to a network with no need to reconfigure your settings manually and restart the computer each time To open the Access Connections program do the follo
115. are If ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software is installed on your computer two icons are displayed on the screen e My Bluetooth Places on the desktop e Bluetooth Configuration in the system tray of the task bar Chapter 2 Using your computer 65 To use the Bluetooth features do the following 1 Double click the My Bluetooth Places icon on the desktop 2 For Windows XP go to Bluetooth Tasks and double click View devices in range A list of the devices on which Bluetooth has been enabled appears 3 Click the device to which you want access A list of the services available on that device appears as follows e Bluetooth keyboard and mouse Human interface devices e Printer HCRP e Audio gateway e Headset e PIM synchronization e Fax e File transfer e PIM item transfer e Dial up networking e Network access e Bluetooth serial port e Bluetooth Imaging e Hands Free e AV profile 4 Click the service you want For more information press the F1 key to open the online help for Bluetooth Bluetooth Configuration To use the configuration features of Bluetooth right click the icon A pop up menu appears Select Bluetooth Setup Wizard or Advanced Configuration The Bluetooth Setup Wizard has the following capabilities e Finding all Bluetooth enabled devices that can provide services e Finding a specific Bluetooth enabled device that you want to use and configuring the services on that device e Configuri
116. as Windows The data is still there even though it seems to be lost Thus it is sometimes possible to read the data by use of special software for data recovery There is a risk that people of bad faith may read and misuse the critical data on hard disk drives or solid state drives for unexpected purposes To prevent leakage of data it becomes very important that you take responsibility for deleting all the data from the hard disk drive or solid state drive when you dispose of sell or hand over your computer You can destroy the data physically by smashing the hard disk drive with a hammer or magnetically by means of strong magnetic power thus making the data unreadable But we recommend that you make use of the software payware or service pay service specifically developed for the purpose For disposing of data on the hard disk drive Lenovo provides such software as PC Doctor for DOS and the Secure Data Disposal tool Software provides the interface for full erasure of the contents of a hard disk To download either application go to the Lenovo Web site at http www lenovo com support Note Running the application will take a couple of hours If Encryption solid state drive or Disk Encryption hard disk drive is supported and installed in your computer you can logically dispose of all the data on a device in a very short time by erasing the cryptographic key The data encrypted with the old key is not physically erased but remains on
117. as not been enrolled To improve the situation try the following e Clean or wipe your hands to remove any excess dirt or moisture from the fingers e Enroll and use a different finger for authentication e If your hands are too dry apply lotion to them Notice on deleting data from your hard disk drive or solid state drive As computers spread into every corner of life they process more and more information The data on your computer some of which is sensitive is stored on a storage device either a hard disk drive or solid state drive Before you dispose of sell or hand over your computer make sure to delete data stored on it Handing your computer over to someone else without deleting the loaded software such as operating systems and application software may even violate License Agreements You are advised to check the terms and conditions of those Agreements There are methods that seem to delete the data e Move the data to the recycle bin and then choose the Empty recycle bin command e Use the Delete command e Format your hard disk drive or solid state drive using the software for initializing it e Using the recovery program provided by Lenovo bring the hard disk drive or the solid state drive back to factory ship state These operations however only change the file allocation of the data they do not delete the data itself In other words the data retrieval processing is disabled under an operating system such
118. ating smoke sparks or fire e Damage to a battery such as cracks dents or creases discharge from a battery or a buildup of foreign substances on the battery e A cracking hissing or popping sound or strong odor that comes from the product e Signs that liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen onto the computer product the power cord or power adapter e The computer product power cord or power adapter has been exposed to water e The product has been dropped or damaged in any way e The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions Note If you notice these conditions with a product such as an extension cord that is not manufactured for or by Lenovo stop using that product until you can contact the product manufacturer for further instructions or until you get a suitable replacement Safety guidelines Always observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury and property damage For more information see Important safety information in the Safety and Warranty Guide comes with your computer Service and upgrades Do not attempt to service a product yourself unless instructed to do so by the Customer Support Center or your documentation Only use a Service Provider who is approved to repair your particular product Note Some computer parts can be upgraded or replaced by the customer Upgrades typically are referred to as options Replacement parts approved for
119. ations for attaching an external monitor When installing an operating system you must install the display driver for your monitor that is supplied with the computer and the Monitor INF file that is supplied with the external monitor If you set a resolution higher than the resolution you are using on the panel and use a panel that does not support that resolution take advantage of the virtual screen function which enables you to display only a part of the high resolution screen image your computer produces You can see other parts of the image by moving the screen with the TrackPoint or other pointing device If the external monitor you are using is outdated the resolution and the refresh rate may be limited Using the DVI monitor If your computer has one of the optional expansion units a ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or a ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 you can use the Digital Visual Interface DVI monitor through the DVI connector of that unit Notes To 1 74 The screen mode that can be used depends on the specifications of the DVI monitor Before you attach the DVI monitor make sure that the computer is attached to the expansion unit and the system works properly attach the DVI monitor do as follows Turn off the computer User Guide 2 Connect the DVI monitor to the DVI connector of the expansion unit and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet 3 Turn on the DVI monitor and the computer The syst
120. attery or Disabled Press F10 N OO fF W PY Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 199 Network Boot sequence When your computer is turned on remotely system will try to boot from the device that is selected by Network Boot setting and then follow the boot order list in the Boot menu To define a sequence 1 On the ThinkPad Setup menu select Startup The Startup submenu appears 2 Select Network Boot and press Enter key to show pop up boot device list 3 Select a boot device from the list to make it as top boot priority 4 Press F10 Note If you want to initialize the setting to return to the default startup sequence press F9 The default settings are automatically reloaded Flash update When a Flash UEFI BIOS update from the network is enabled a network administrator can remotely update the system programs in your computer from a management console The following requirements must be met e Update Flash from network must also be enabled the procedure is given below e Your computer must be started over the LAN e Your computer must be engaged in a Preboot eXecution Environment e Network management software must be installed in the remote administrator s computer To enable or disable the Flash update from the network setting do the following 1 On the ThinkPad Setup menu select Security The Security submenu appears 2 Select UEFI BIOS Update Option The UEFI BIOS Update Option submenu appears 3 For Flash Over LA
121. attery status indicator starts blinking orange e Always use power management features such as power modes screen blank sleep standby and hibernation Managing your battery power With Power Manager you can adjust your power settings to give you the best balance between performance and power saving To start the utility program do as follows e For Windows 7 See Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 e For Windows Vista and Windows XP Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Power Manager For more information about the Power Manager program refer to the on line help of the program Power saving modes There are several modes that you can use at any time to conserve power This section introduces each mode and gives tips on the effective use of the battery power Introducing the power saving modes e Screen blank The computer display requires considerable battery power To turn off power to the display do as follows 1 Press Fn F3 A panel for selecting a power plan in Windows XP power scheme appears Chapter 2 Using your computer 59 2 Select Power off display keep current power plan in Windows XP keep current power scheme Notes You can also turn off the computer display as follows 1 Press Fn F3 A panel for selecting a power plan in Windows XP power scheme appears 2 Select Fn F3 Settings 3 Select Power off display 4 Click OK The next time you press Fn F3 you can turn
122. battery on page 116 7 Turn the computer over again and reconnect the cables Chapter 6 Replacing devices 147 148 User Guide Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer This section provides information on installing devices and taking advantage of your computer s high technology features e Finding ThinkPad options on page 149 e ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 on page 149 e ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 and ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 on page 159 Finding ThinkPad options If you want to expand the capabilities of your computer Lenovo has a number of hardware accessories and upgrades to meet your needs Options include memory storage modems networking adapters docking stations and port replicators batteries power adapters printers scanners keyboards mice and more You can shop at Lenovo 24 hours a day 7 days a week directly over the World Wide Web All you need is an Internet connection and a credit card To shop at Lenovo go to http www lenovo com accessories services index html ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 Your ThinkPad X220 X220i X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet support the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 After you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 you can use its connectors in place of the computer s When the computer is attached to the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 never pick up the assembly by taking hold of the computer alone
123. ble self test media from the following Web site http Awww lenovo com hddtest Run the test and record any messages or error codes If the test returns any failing error codes or messages call the Customer Support Center with the codes or messages and the computer in front of you A technician will assist you further Copyright Lenovo 2011 201 14 If required you can find your country s Customer Support Center at the following Web address http www lenovo com support site wss document do sitestyle lenovo amp lndocid migr 4hwse3 When calling the Customer Support Center please make sure you have your machine model type serial number and the computer in front of you Also if the machine is producing error codes it is helpful to have the error screen on or the message written down Making sure device drivers are current Device drivers are programs that contain instructions for the operating system about how to operate or drive a certain piece of hardware Each hardware component on your computer has its own specific driver If you add a new component the operating system needs to be instructed on how to operate that piece of hardware After you install the driver the operating system can recognize the hardware component and understand how to use it Note Because drivers are programs like any other file on your computer they are susceptible to corruption and might not perform properly if corruption occurs It is not always
124. bmenu under the Security menu of the ThinkPad Setup are as follows e Security Chip activates inactivates or disables the Security Chip e Security Reporting Options enables or disables each Security Reporting Option e Clear Security Chip clears the encryption key Notes 1 Be sure that the Supervisor password has been set in the ThinkPad Setup Otherwise anyone can change the settings for the Security Chip 2 If you are using Client Security Solution handle the Security Chip as follows e Do not clear the Security Chip If you do the functions assigned to the keys will be erased e Do not disable the Security Chip If you do Client Security Solution will not work 3 If the Security Chip is removed or replaced or a new one has been added the computer will not start You will hear 4 cycles of 4 beeps each or you see error message 0176 or 0192 4 If the Security Chip is inactive or disabled Clear Security Chip will not be displayed 5 When you clear the Security chip be sure to turn your computer off and then turn it on again after you set the Security chip to Active Otherwise the choice of Clear Security Chip is not displayed To set an item in the Security Chip submenu 1 Print these instructions To set the Security Chip you must turn your computer off and then on again Save all open files and exit all applications Turn your computer off and then turn it on again When the logo screen is displayed press F1
125. ce Status is This device is working properly For Windows Vista 1 Click Start gt Control Panel 2 Click Hardware and Sound and then click Keyboard 3 Select the Hardware tab In the Device Properties make sure that the Device Status is This device is working properly For Windows XP 1 Click Start gt Control Panel 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware and then click Keyboard 3 Select the Hardware tab In the In the Device Properties make sure that the Device Status is This device is working properly If Keys on the keyboard still do not work have the computer serviced e Problem A number appears when you type a letter Solution The numeric lock function is on To disable it press Shift ScrLk or Fn NmLk e Problem All or some keys on the external numeric keypad do not work Solution Make sure that the external numeric keypad is correctly connected to the computer Display and multimedia devices This section includes the most common display and multimedia devices problems which are computer screen external monitor audio and optical drive Check these topics to learn more information Computer screen problems e Problem The screen is blank Solution Do the following Press Fn F7 to bring up the image Note If you use the Fn F7 key combination to apply a presentation scheme press Fn F7 at least three times in three seconds and the image is displayed on the computer screen If you are using the ac
126. ce to a Lenovo product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead However it is the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product program or service Lenovo may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to Lenovo United States Inc 1009 Think Place Building One Morrisville NC 27560 U S A Attention Lenovo Director of Licensing LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication Lenovo may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this publication a
127. charged with a computer both the main battery and ThinkPad Battery 19 can be charged simultaneously ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 and ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 Note Only ThinkPad X220 and X220i support ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 and ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 After you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 you can use its connectors in place of the computer s When the computer is attached to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 never pick up the assembly by taking hold of the computer alone Always hold the whole assembly For more details about the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 refer to the following Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer 159 e Front view on page 160 e Rear view on page 163 e Attaching a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 on page 166 e Detaching a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 and ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 on page 168 e Security feature on page 170 e Using the system lock key on page 172 Front view ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3
128. ck do not connect the telephone cable to the Ethernet connector Cleaning the cover of your computer Occasionally clean your computer as follows 1 Prepare a mixture of a gentle kitchen use detergent one that does not contain abrasive powder or strong chemicals such as acid or alkaline Use 5 parts water to 1 part detergent Absorb the diluted detergent into a sponge Squeeze excess liquid from the sponge Wipe the cover with the sponge using a circular motion and taking care not to let any excess liquid drip Wipe the surface to remove the detergent Rinse the sponge with clean running water Wipe the cover with the clean sponge Wipe the surface again with a dry soft lint free cloth O OAN DO FW PY Wait for the surface to dry completely and remove any fibers from the cloth Cleaning your computer keyboard 1 Apply some isopropyl rubbing alcohol to a soft dust free cloth 2 Wipe each keytop surface with the cloth Wipe the keys one by one if you wipe several keys at a time the cloth may hook onto an adjacent key and possibly damage it Make sure that no liquid drips onto or between the keys 3 Allow to dry 4 To remove any crumbs or dust from beneath the keys you can use a camera blower with a brush or cool air from a hair dryer Note Avoid spraying cleaner directly onto the display or the keyboard Cleaning your computer display 1 Gently wipe the display with a dry soft lint free cloth If
129. ck the Color Management tab Click Add Select TPFLX ICM or TPLCD ICM and click Add Click OK and close the Display Properties window Installing Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 Before you begin Before you install the operating system Copy all the subdirectories and files in the C SWTOOLS directory to a removable storage device to avoid losing files during the installation To install Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 do the following 1 2 Restore C SWTOOLS from the backup copy you made before starting the installation Run infinst_autol exe in C SWTOOLS DRIVERS INTELINF 180 User Guide Installing drivers and software The device drivers are provided in the C SWTOOLS DRIVERS directory on your hard disk drive You will also need to install application software which is provided in the C SWTOOLS APPS directory on your hard disk drive To do this refer to the instructions in Reinstalling preinstalled applications and device drivers on page 112 Note If you cannot find the Supplement files device drivers and application software you need on your hard disk drive or if you want to receive updates and the latest information about them refer to the ThinkPad Web site at http www lenovo com support site wss document do sitestyle lenovo amp lndocid tpad matrix ThinkPad Setup Your computer provides a program called ThinkPad Setup that enables you to select various setup
130. click The eraser tip J functions like an eraser in applications that support this function Using the touch panel Some models have the touch panel feature This feature makes interaction with your computer even more natural because you can use fingers instead of a pen for navigation on the go 44 User Guide For a single click tap the display once with your finger For a double click tap the display twice without pausing For a right click tap the display once and then hold your finger on the display until a circular symbol appears When you take your finger off the display the right click menu will open Using the multitouch panel On a model that has the multitouch panel feature the touch panel supports multitouch with which you can zoom in zoom out scroll or rotate on the screen with your two fingers while browsing the Internet or reading or editing a document The multitouch panel supports the capacitive touch Even the slightest contact of your electron rich finger with the screen s glass is enough to activate the capacitive sensing system This function does not work with inanimate objects fingernails gloved fingers Advanced palm rejection technology helps to prevent inadvertent contact with a pen or a finger which could disrupt finger input Tips on using the touch panel e The touch panel is a glass panel covered with a plastic film For input you can use either your finger or the Tablet Digitizer Pen shipped with your
131. cluded in the Excluded from boot order list it is disabled Select the entry for it in the list and press the Shift 1 key This moves the entry to the Boot priority order list Problem After setting a hard disk password on the hard disk drive of the computer you moved the drive to another computer Now you cannot unlock the hard disk password Solution Your computer supports an enhanced password algorithm Computers older than yours may not support such a security function Solid state drive problems Problem When you compress files or folders by use of the data compression function in Windows and then decompress them the process of writing to or reading from the files or folders is slow Solution Apply the disk defragmentation tool in Windows for faster access to the data Software problems Problem An application does not run correctly Solution Make sure that the problem is not being caused by the application Check that your computer has the minimum required memory to run the application Refer to the manuals supplied with the application Check the following 232 User Guide The application is designed to operate with your operating system Other applications run correctly on your computer The necessary device drivers are installed The application works when it is run on some other computer If an error message appears while you are using the application program refer to the manuals supp
132. computer under less than perfect lighting conditions by enabling the ThinkLight feature To illuminate the keyboard by turning on your ThinkLight press Fn PgUp ATN Note Avoid using your computer in dark conditions for prolonged periods It is bad for your eyes Note ThinkLight is not available in ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet models Using the media card reader Depending on the model your computer may have an ExpressCard slot for a 54 mm wide card a media card reader slot or a smart card reader slot If your computer has a media card reader slot it supports the following cards e SD card e SDHC card e SDXC card e MultiMediaCard MMC Notes e Your computer does not support the CPRM feature for the SD card e When transferring data to or from a flash media card such as an SD card do not put your computer in sleep standby or hibernation mode before the data transfer is complete To do so might cause damage to your data Chapter 2 Using your computer 79 For more information on ExpressCards smart cards and flash media cards refer to any of the following topics e Inserting an ExpressCard a flash media card or a smart card on page 80 e Removing an ExpressCard a flash media card or a smart card on page 81 Inserting an ExpressCard a flash media card or a smart card Attention Do not insert an ExpressCard while the computer is in sleep standby mode or hibernation mode If you do the
133. customer installation are referred to as Customer Copyright Lenovo 2011 vii Replaceable Units or CRUs Lenovo provides documentation with instructions when it is appropriate for customers to install options or replace CRUs You must closely follow all instructions when installing or replacing parts The Off state of a power indicator does not necessarily mean that voltage levels inside a product are zero Before you remove the covers from a product equipped with a power cord always make sure that the power is turned off and that the product is unplugged from any power source For more information on CRUs refer to Chapter 6 Replacing devices on page 115 for this product If you have any questions or concerns contact the Customer Support Center Although there are no moving parts in your computer after the power cord has been disconnected the following warnings are required for your safety nanoen Hazardous moving parts Keep fingers and other body parts away CAUTION Before replacing any CRUs turn off the computer and wait three to five minutes to let the computer cool before opening the cover viii User Guide Power cords and power adapters bancer Use only the power cords and power adapters supplied by the product manufacturer The power cords shall be safety approved For Germany it shall be HO5VV F 3G 0 75 mm or better For other countries the suitable types shall be used accordingly Never wrap a p
134. d and optional to help you understand the importance You have complete control of which updates to download and install After you select the update packages you want the System Update program automatically downloads and installs the updates without any further intervention from you The System Update program is preinstalled on your computer and is ready to run The only prerequisite is an active Internet connection You can start the program manually or you can use the schedule feature to enable the program to search for updates automatically at specified intervals You also can predefine scheduled updates to search by severity critical updates critical and recommended updates or all updates so the list you choose from contains only those update types that are of interest to you For more information about how to use the System Update refer to System Update on page 37 202 User Guide Taking care of your computer Although your computer is designed to function reliably in normal work environments you need to use common sense in handling it By following these important tips you will get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer Be careful about where and how you work e Store packing materials safely out of the reach of children to prevent the risk of suffocation from plastic bags e Keep your computer away from magnets activated cellular phones electrical appliances or speakers within 13 cm or 5 inch e Avo
135. d computer to the ThinkPad Battery 19 Bottom view The power jack is where you connect the AC adapter H By pressing the indicator button the status indicator shows the ThinkPad Battery 19 charge status EJ The status indicator is to show the ThinkPad Battery 19 charge status Ei The eject lever is to release the ThinkPad Battery 19 from the docking connector in the computer H The battery latch prevents the eject lever from being released Attaching a ThinkPad Battery 19 Attention Disconnect the AC power from your computer before you attach the ThinkPad Battery 19 The AC adapter connector will be damaged if it remains connected to the computer during the attachment To attach a ThinkPad Battery 19 do the following 1 Align the front of the computer with the front of the ThinkPad Battery 19 156 User Guide 2 Make sure that the guides of the ThinkPad Battery 19 align with the holes of the computer E Then put the computer in place Detaching a ThinkPad Battery 19 To detach a ThinkPad Battery 19 do the following 1 Unlock the battery latch by sliding it to the unlock position Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer 157 2 Release the eject lever Ej and pull up the ThinkPad Battery 19 Charging a ThinkPad Battery 19 The ThinkPad Battery 19 can be charged separately 158 User Guide The ThinkPad Battery 19 can also be charged with a computer When the ThinkPad Battery 19 is
136. d for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation 4 From the left pane select the task folder for which you want to enable the wakeup function The scheduled tasks are displayed 5 Click a scheduled task and then click the Conditions tab 6 Under Power select the check box for Wake the computer to run this task For Windows XP 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Performance and Maintenance 2 Click Scheduled Tasks The scheduled tasks are displayed 3 Right click on a scheduled task 4 Click Properties 5 Click the Settings tab 6 Under Power Management select the check box for Wake the computer to run this task Enabling the battery alarm You can program your computer so that when the battery power falls below a certain level three events occur the alarm goes off a message is displayed and the LCD is turned off Do as follows 1 Start Power Manager 60 User Guide 2 Click the Global Power Settings tab 3 For Low battery alarm or Critically low battery alarm set the percentage of the power level and set the action Note If your computer enters sleep standby or hibernation mode when the battery is low but the alarm message has not yet appeared the message will appear when the computer resumes To resume normal operation press OK Handling the battery T Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the battery pack Attempting to do so can cause an explosion
137. data CMOS Reporting CMOS data NVRAM Reporting Security data stored in the Asset ID SMBIOS Reporting SMBIOS data Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 193 Table 7 Security menu items continued Clear Security Chip Intel TXT Feature UEFI BIOS Update Option Flash BIOS Updating by End Users Flash Over LAN Memory Protection Execution Prevention Virtualization Intel Virtualization Technology Intel VT d Feature 194 User Guide Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Clear the encryption key Note Only if you select Active for Security Chip this item appears Enable or disable Intel Trusted Execution Technology If you select Enabled all users can update the UEFI BIOS If you select Disabled only the person who knows supervisor password can update the UEFI BIOS Enable your computer s UEFI BIOS to be updated flashed over an active network connection Some computer viruses and worms cause memory buffers to overflow by running code where only data is allowed If the Data Execution Prevention feature can be used with your operating system then by selecting Enabled you can protect your computer against attacks by such viruses and worms If after choosing Enabled you find that an application program does not run correctly select Disabled and reset the setting If you sel
138. de available for your computer though there is no indicator for it is Scroll Lock mode When this mode is enabled the arrow keys can be used as function keys for screen scrolling but not for moving the cursor To enable or disable this mode press ScrLk Not all application programs support this function Power status indicators The computer has status indicators that show the mode sleep standby hibernation or normal ac power status the status of the battery and the status of the color sensor on some models The following shows the location and the meaning of the indicators A Sleep standby in Windows XP status e Green The computer is in sleep standby mode e Blinking green The computer is entering sleep standby or hibernation mode or is resuming normal operation H Battery status e Green The battery charge level is 20 or higher e Orange The battery charge level is between 5 and 20 e Fast blinking orange The battery charge level is lower than 5 e Slow blinking orange The battery is being charged When it reaches 20 the blinking color changes to green e Slow blinking green The battery has between 20 and 80 charge and charging is continuing When the battery reaches 80 charge the battery status indicator stops blinking but the charging may continue until the battery is 100 charged Note If the computer is operating on battery power the battery status indicator does not work while the c
139. device drivers for some devices See Reinstalling preinstalled applications and device drivers on page 112 2 Some computers come with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works preinstalled If you need to recover or reinstall your Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works applications you must use the Microsoft Office CD or Microsoft Works CD These discs are provided only with computers preinstalled with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works On the Windows XP operating system you can use Product Recovery discs to restore your computer to the factory default settings perform a custom factory recovery or perform other rescue and recovery operations such as rescuing individual files You will be given the option to enter the Rescue and Recovery workspace and choose from a variety of recovery operations Attention When you use Product Recovery discs to restore the computer to the factory default settings all the files currently on the hard disk drive will be deleted and replaced by the factory default settings During the restore process you will be given the option to save one or more files currently on the hard disk drive to other media before the data is deleted To use Product Recovery discs on the Windows XP operating system do the following 108 User Guide 1 Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer When the Startup Device Menu opens release the F12 key 2 Insert the boot disc into the optical drive 3
140. dium on the Windows Vista operating system or the Windows XP operating system do the following 1 From the Windows desktop click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Create Recovery Media The Create Rescue and Recovery Media window opens 2 Inthe Rescue Media area select the type of the rescue medium you want to create You can create a rescue medium using a disc a USB hard disk drive or a secondary internal hard disk drive 3 Click OK and follow the instructions on the screen to create a rescue medium Using a rescue medium This section provides instructions on how to use the rescue medium you have created Chapter 5 Recovery overview 111 e Ifyou have created a rescue medium using a disc use the following instructions to use the rescue medium 1 Turn off your computer 2 Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer When the Startup Device Menu opens release the F12 key 3 On the Startup Device Menu select the desired optical drive as the first boot device Then insert the rescue disc into the optical drive and press Enter The rescue medium starts e If you have created a rescue medium using a USB hard disk drive use the following instructions to use the rescue medium 1 Attach the USB hard disk drive to one of the USB connectors on your computer 2 Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer When the Startup Device Menu opens release the F12 key
141. dows XP 176 Installing device drivers 178 Installing the driver for the 4 in A Media Card Reader woe ace toe 178 Installing the diver foi USB B08 ee e 178 Installing ThinkPad Monitor File for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 179 Installing Intel Chipset Suppor far Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 oo go ete 180 Installing drivers and Sofas pape hai 181 ThinkPad Setup 2 2 2 2 181 Config menu Date and time menu Security menu Startup menu Restart menu ThinkPad Setup items Updating your system UEFI BIOS Using system management System management Setting management features Chapter 9 Preventing problems General tips for preventing problems Making sure device drivers are current Getting the latest drivers from the Web site Getting the latest drivers using System Update fe Be ae Taking care of your computer ie Cleaning the cover of your computer Chapter 10 Litas aang computer problems Diagnosing problems i Using Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox F Troubleshooting rae Computer stops responding Spills on the keyboard Error messages Errors without messages Beep errors Memory problems Modem and networking d Keyboard and other pointing devices Display and multimedia devices Fingerprint reader problems Battery and power pii Drives and other storage devices Software problems Ports and connectors Universal Serial Bus problems A docking s
142. dy and it is getting slower e Follow the General tips for preventing problems on page 201 e You can diagnose problems yourself by using the preinstalled software 40 User Guide e Also Recovery tool is provided on your computer hard disk or solid state drive For more information see Chapter 5 Recovery overview on page 107 Print the following sections and keep them with your computer in case you are unable to access this online help when necessary e Installing a new operating system on page 173 e Computer stops responding on page 208 e Power problems on page 229 Tablet mode ThinkPad X220 Tablet or X220i Tablet notebook can be used in tablet mode taking advantage of the features and benefits of a tablet PC Using the tablet mode In the tablet mode you can use your computer in a creative and intuitive way by jotting down notes and illustrations with the Tablet Digitizer Pen and then storing them digitally To use your computer in the tablet mode do as follows 1 Open the computer display slowly holding the upper left and right sides of the display with both hands Your computer is now in the notebook mode 2 Open the display by at least 45 degrees preferably by 90 degrees Grasp the center of one side of the computer display with one hand while holding the keyboard bezel with the other hand then rotate the display slowly clockwise until the back of the display is facing the keyboard Yo
143. e 149 Tips for using the wireless LAN feature e Place your computer so that there are as few obstacles as possible between the wireless LAN access point and the computer e For the best connection of the wireless LAN feature open your computer display to an angle of slightly more than 90 degrees e f you use the wireless feature the 802 11 standard of your computer simultaneously with a Bluetooth option data transmission speed can be delayed and the performance of the wireless feature can be degraded Wireless networking setup To use the built in wireless networking card the 802 11 standard to communicate start Access Connections Note Before you start setting up wireless networking connections by using Access Connections obtain a Network Name SSID and your encryption information from your network administrator Access Connections a connectivity assistant program can easily enable one network adapter and disable the other adapters on demand After setting up your wireless networking connection you can use the program to quickly switch the network settings Chapter 2 Using your computer 63 Wireless upgradeable ThinkPad models Your computer can be wireless upgradeable This means that your computer has an antenna that can support wireless LAN access when wireless LAN access points are available Wireless devices are available from Lenovo For more information see Finding ThinkPad options on page 149 Using wir
144. e Enabled can use the eSATA Port Memory Card Slot e Disabled If you select Enabled e Enabled you can use the Memory Card slot SD Card MultiMediaCarda Integrated Camera e Disabled If you select Enabled e Enabled you can use the Integrated Camera Microphone e Disabled If you select Enabled you e Enabled can use the Microphone Internal External or Line In Fingerprint Reader e Disabled If you select Enabled e Enabled you can use the fingerprint reader Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 195 Table 7 Security menu items continued Anti Theft Intel AT Module Activation e Disabled Enable or disable the UEFI BIOS interface to activate E l s Enebled i Intel AT module that is an e Permanently Disabled optional Anti Theft service from Intel Note If you set the Intel AT module activation to Permanently Disabled you will be unable to enable this setting again Computrace Module Disabled Enable or disable the UEFI Activation Enabled BIOS interface to activate Computrace module Permanently Disabled Computrace is an optional monitoring service from Absolute Software Note If you set the Computrace module activation to Permanently Disabled you will be unable to enable this setting again Startup menu items Table 8 Startup menu items Comments Refer to Startup menu on page 184 Refer to Startup menu on page 184 UEFI Legacy Boot Select system boot ca
145. e Your computer display is designed to be opened and used at an angle slightly greater than 90 degrees Do not open the display beyond 180 degrees as this might damage the computer hinge e Do not turn your computer over while the ac power adapter is plugged in This could break the adapter plug Carry your computer properly e Before moving your computer be sure to remove any media turn off attached devices and disconnect cords and cables e When picking up your open computer hold it by the bottom Do not pick up or hold your computer by the display Handle storage media and drives properly e If your computer comes with an optical drive do not touch the surface of a disc or the lens on the tray e Wait until you hear the CD or DVD click into the center pivot of the drive before closing the tray e On your computer use only optical drives designed for use with the serial Ultrabay enhanced Note You can install a 9 5 mm thick serial Ultrabay slim or a 12 7 mm thick serial Ultrabay enhanced device in the serial Ultrabay enhanced Chapter 9 Preventing problems 203 e When installing the hard disk drive solid state drive or optical drive follow the instructions shipped with your hardware and apply pressure only where needed on the device e Turn off your computer if you are replacing the hard disk drive or solid state drive e When replacing the primary hard disk drive or solid state drive reattach the cover of the drive slot e
146. e and software configuration information for your system Telephone numbers Note Telephone numbers are subject to change without notice For the latest list of Customer Support Center telephone numbers and hours of operation go to the Support Web site at http www lenovo com support phone Table 10 World wide telephone list Country or Region Telephone Number Africa Africa 44 0 1475 555 055 South Africa 27 11 3028888 0800110756 and 27 11 3027252 Central Africa Contact the nearest Lenovo Business Partner Austria 0043 0810 100654 Warranty service and support German Belgium 02 225 3611 Warranty service and support Dutch and French Brazil Sao Paulo region 11 3889 8986 Outside Sao Paulo region 0800 701 4815 Brazilian Portuguese Chapter 11 Getting support 237 Table 10 World wide telephone list continued Country or Region Telephone Number Brunei 801 1041 English and Bahasa Melayu Canada 1 800 565 3344 English and French Caribbean 1 877 426 7378 English Bermuda Jamaica and Tortola 800 361 213 188 800 442 488 Toll free Spanish Technical Support Line 800 990 8888 86 10 58851110 Mandarin China ThinkPad Technical enquiry hotline Hong Kong S A R 2516 3939 Hong Kong ThinkPad Service Center 3140 2788 Hong Kong Cantonese English and Mandarin China ThinkPad Technical enquiry hotline Macau S A R 0800 839 Macau ThinkPad Service Center 2871 5399
147. e drive with the corresponding socket Note You can also replace the mSATA solid state drive with a Wireless PCI Express Mini Card for Wireless WAN 10 Reinstall the palm rest For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the palm rest on page 122 11 Reinstall the keyboard For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the keyboard on page 118 12 Reinstall the battery For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the battery on page 116 13 Turn the computer over again Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer then turn it on Replacing memory Before you start print these instructions Prerequisites for the procedure When replacing the memory be sure to follow the precautions Chapter 6 Replacing devices 143 Note The operating speed of the memory module depends on the system configuration of your computer and its combination with the memory module installed on your computer In some conditions the memory in your computer may not be able to operate at the maximum speed Attention Before you start installing a module touch a metal table or a grounded metal object This action reduces any static electricity from your body The static electricity could damage the SO DIMM To replace the SO DIMM do the following 1 Turn off the computer then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer 2 Close the computer display and turn it over 3 Remov
148. e numeric lock setting do as follows For Windows 7 1 Right click on the desktop and click Personalize 2 Click Display at the left 3 Click Change display settings 4 Click Advanced settings select the On Screen Display tab and then click Num Lock Settings 5 The setting window opens 6 Follow the instructions on the screen For Windows Vista 1 Right click on the desktop and click Personalize 2 Click Display Settings 3 Click Advanced Settings select the On Screen Display tab and then click Num Lock Settings 4 The setting window opens 5 Follow the instructions on the screen For Windows XP 1 Right click on the desktop and click Properties The Display Properties window opens 2 Click the Settings tab 3 Click Advanced select the On Screen Display tab and then click Num Lock Settings 4 The setting window opens 5 Follow the instructions on the screen Connecting a projector or external display Attaching an external monitor Your computer can support a maximum video resolution of up to 2048x1536 with an external monitor attached to the CRT connector or up to 2560x1600 with an external monitor attached to the DisplayPort connector provided that the external monitor also supports that resolution For more details refer to the manuals provided with your monitor You can set any resolution for either the computer display or the external monitor When you use both at the same time the resolution of both
149. e screen Record information Before you talk to a Lenovo representative record the following important information about your computer Record problem symptoms and details Collect the answers to the questions below before you call for help Then you will be able to get help as quickly as possible e What is the problem Is it continuous or intermittent e Is there an error message that appears What is the error code if any e What operating system are you using Which version e Which software applications were running at the time of the problem e Can the problem be reproduced If so how Record system information The serial number label is on the bottom of your computer Record the machine type and the serial number e What is the name of your Lenovo product e What is the machine type e What is the serial number Copyright Lenovo 2011 235 Getting help and service If you need help service technical assistance or just want more information about Lenovo products you will find a wide variety of sources available from Lenovo to assist you This section contains information about where to go for additional information about Lenovo and our products what to do if you experience a problem with your computer and whom to call for service should it be necessary Information about your computer and preinstalled software if any is available in the documentation that comes with your computer That documentation includes
150. e support in English please wait for the Japanese voice prompt to end and an operator will answer Please say English support please and your call will be transferred to an English operator 1800 88 1889 Local number only 603 8315 6855 DID English and Bahasa Melayu Norway 8152 1550 service and support Norwegian Chapter 11 Getting support 239 Table 10 World wide telephone list continued Country or Region Panama Peru Philippines Poland Portugal Romania RUCIS Russia and CIS Singapore Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand Turkey United Kingdom United States Uruguay 240 User Guide Telephone Number 206 6047 001 866 434 2080 Lenovo Customer Support Center toll free Spanish 0 800 50 866 Spanish 1800 1601 0033 Local number only 603 8315 6858 DID English and Filipino 48 22 760 73 00 Polski 351 21 892 7046 Portuguese 4 021 224 4015 For Russia 8 800 100 7888 Toll free number For CIS Countries 0040 31 620 5099 Payable Russian and English 800 6011 343 Local number only 603 8315 6856 DID English 421 2 4954 5555 386 1 200 50 60 Slovenian 91 714 7983 0901 100 000 Spanish 9411 2493547 9411 2493548 English 077 117 1040 Warranty service and support Swedish 0800 55 54 54 Warranty service and support German French and Italian 886 2 82273299
151. e the battery Refer to Replacing the battery on page 116 for details about how to replacing the battery 4 Loosen the screws on the memory slot cover E then remove the cover H If the two SO DIMMs are already in the memory slots remove an SO DIMM to make room for the new one by pressing out on the latches on both edges of the socket at the same time Be sure to save it for future use H 5 Find the notch on the contact edge side of the SO DIMM you are installing Attention To avoid damaging the SO DIMM do not touch its contact edge 144 User Guide 6 With the notched end of the SO DIMM toward the contact edge side of the socket insert the SO DIMM into the socket at an angle of about 20 degrees E then press it in firmly H Note If you install a memory module in only one of the two memory slots install it in the lower slot 7 Pivot the SO DIMM downward until it snaps into place 8 Make sure that the SO DIMM is firmly fixed in the slot and cannot be moved easily 9 Put the memory slot cover back in place ff close the cover and tighten the screws H 10 Put the battery back in place turn the computer over again and reconnect the cables For information about how to replace the battery refer to Replacing the battery on page 116 To make sure that the SO DIMM is installed correctly do as follows 1 Turn the computer on Chapter 6 Replacing devices 145 2 When the logo screen is displayed press the F
152. e the battery pack e Problem The operating time for a fully charged battery pack is short Solution Discharge and recharge the battery pack If your battery s operating time is still short use a new battery pack e Problem The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery pack Solution The surge protector in the battery pack might be active Turn off the computer for one minute to reset the protector then turn on the computer again e Problem The battery pack cannot be charged Solution You cannot charge the battery when it is too hot If the battery feels hot remove it from the computer and allow it to cool to room temperature After it cools reinstall it and recharge the battery If it still cannot be charged have it serviced AC power adapter problems e Problem The ac power adapter is connected to the computer and the working electrical outlet but the power adapter power plug icon is not displayed in the task bar Also the ac power indicator does not light up Solution Do as follows 1 Make sure that the connection of the ac power adapter is correct For connecting the ac power adapter see the Setup Instructions manual included in the shipping contents of your computer 2 If the above step is correct turn off the computer then disconnect the ac power adapter and uninstall the main battery 3 Reinstall the battery and reconnect the ac power adapter then turn on the computer 4 If the power adapt
153. eable battery pack is incorrectly replaced there is danger of an explosion The battery pack contains a small amount of harmful substances To avoid possible injury Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo Keep the battery pack away from fire Do not expose it to excessive heat Do not expose it to water or rain Do not short circuit it Do not drop crush puncture or subject to strong forces Battery abuse or mishandling can cause the battery to overheat which can cause gasses or flame to vent from the battery pack or coin cell To replace the battery follow the procedures below Replacing the battery installed in the battery space of your computer 1 Turn off the computer or enter hibernation mode Then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer 2 Close the computer display and turn the computer over 116 User Guide 3 Unlock the battery latch by sliding it to the unlock position of 4 Remove the battery 5 Slide the battery into the computer 4 g Chapter 6 Replacing devices 117 6 Slide the battery latch to the locked position 7 Turn the computer over again Connect the ac power adapter and the cables to the computer Replacing the keyboard Before you start print these instructions You can use the following procedures to replace the keyboard with a new one available as an option Prerequisites for the procedure Mr
154. eature is on and the radio link is ready for use or the data is being transmitted e Off The Bluetooth feature is disabled Chapter 1 Product Overview 21 Device Access A hard disk drive or an optional drive such as a drive in the Ultrabay is being used to read or write data When this indicator is blinking do not put the computer into sleep standby mode remove the device from the bay or turn off the computer EJ Numeric lock By default when the numeric lock is on the numeric lock indicator is displayed on the screen To change the settings of the numeric lock indicator see Changing display settings on page 70 Note Another mode available for your computer though there is no indicator for it is Scroll Lock mode When this mode is enabled the arrow keys can be used as function keys for screen scrolling but not for moving the cursor To enable or disable this mode press ScrLk Not all application programs support this function Power status indicators The computer has status indicators that show the mode sleep standby hibernation or normal ac power status the status of the battery and the status of the color sensor on some models The following shows the location and the meaning of the indicators All Sleep standby in Windows XP status e Green The computer is in sleep standby mode e Blinking green The computer is entering sleep standby or hibernation mode or is resuming normal operation
155. ect Enabled a VMM Virtual Machine Monitor can utilize the additional hardware capabilities provided by Intel Virtualization Technology Intel VT d is Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I O When enabled a VMM can utilize the platform infrastructure for I O virtualization Table 7 Security menu items continued Menutem submenunem serci Comments I O Port Access Ethernet LAN e Disabled If you select Enabled you e Enabled can use the Ethernet LAN device Wireless LAN e Disabled If you select Enabled you e Enabled can use the Wireless LAN device WiMAX e Disabled If you select Enabled you e Enabled can use the WiMAX device Wireless WAN e Disabled If you select Enabled you e Enabled can use the Wireless WAN device Bluetooth e Disabled If you select Enabled e Enabled you can use the Bluetooth device Modem e Disabled If you select Enabled you e Enabled can use the Modem device USB Port e Disabled If you select Enabled you e Enabled can use the USB port IEEE 1394 e Disabled If you select Enabled e Enabled you can use the IEEE 1394 Firewire device ExpressCard Slot e Disabled If you select Enabled you e Enabled can use the ExpressCard Slot Ultrabay HDD Optical e Disabled If you select Enabled Enabled you can use the Ultrabay T Eee HDD Optical device eSATA Port e Disabled If you select Enabled you
156. ect the external monitor to the monitor connector and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet 2 Turn on the external monitor and the computer w Right click on the desktop and click Screen resolution Note If your computer cannot detect the external monitor click the Detect button Click the icon for the desired monitor the Monitor 2 icon is for the external monitor Click Advanced Settings Click the Monitor tab Select the correct screen refresh rate N OO On f For Windows Vista 1 Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet 2 Turn on the external monitor and the computer wo Press Fn F7 to change the display output location to the external monitor Note After pressing Fn F7 you will need to wait for a moment before the image appears Right click on the desktop and click Personalize Click Display Settings Click the Advanced Settings button Click the Monitor tab 8 Select the correct screen refresh rate For Windows XP N OO f Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems 223 1 Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet 2 Turn on the external monitor and the computer 3 Press Fn F7 to change the display output location to the external monitor Note After pressing Fn F7 you will need to wait for a moment before the image appears 4
157. ed Note Power On NumLock will be displayed if you select Synchronized at the ThinkPad NumLock Table 6 Config menu items continued Ci a Ca a Display Boot Display Device Graphics Device OS Detection for NVIDIA Optimus Intel SpeedStep technology Intel SpeedStep mounted models only ThinkPad LCD Analog VGA Digital on ThinkPad Digital 1 on dock Digital 2 on dock e Integrated Graphics e Discrete Graphics e NVIDIA Optimus Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Mode for AC e Maximum Performance e Battery Optimized Mode for Battery e Maximum Performance e Battery Optimized Select the display device that is to be active at boot time This selection is effective for boot time password prompt and ThinkPad Setup Digital on Thinkpad is DisplayPort on your computer Digial 1 on dock and Digital 2 on dock are DisplayPort or DVI on docking station Integrated Graphics will achieve longer battery life and Discrete Graphics enhances performance NVIDIA Optimus runs as Integrated Graphics mode and Discrete Graphics is enabled on demand Note NVIDIA Optimus mode should only be selected if you are using a Windows 7 model System BIOS automatically switches Graphics device setting to NVIDIA Optimus mode if the OS supports the feature and to Discrete Graphics if the OS does not support it Select the mode of Intel SpeedStep technology at runtime
158. ed to dial up clients you can use a modem to establish a connection to the LAN If your network does not have dial up networking capability and many do not you might be able to access some information and e mail over the Internet Ethernet connections You can connect to your network or a broadband connection such as DSL or CATV by use of the Ethernet feature built into your computer This feature enables you to do 1Gbps half or full duplex data transmission To connect to a network via Ethernet you can use Access Connections Note Your computer might have both a modem connector and an Ethernet connector Be sure to connect your cable to the correct one Wireless connections Wireless connection is the transfer of data without the use of cables by means of radio waves only Depending on the frequency used for data transmission the area covered or the type of the device used for data transfer the following categories of wireless networks may be available to you 62 User Guide Wireless LAN A wireless local area network covers a relatively small geographic area such as an office building or a house Devices based on the 802 11 standards can connect to this network Wireless WAN A wireless wide area network covers a broader geographic area Cellular networks are used for data transmission and access is provided by a wireless service carrier Bluetooth One of a number of technologies used to create a wireless personal are
159. eject request button you can tell the operating system to get ready for undocking E The docking indicator is red when your computer is docked It blinks when the eject request button is pressed EJ The eject lever detaches your computer from the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 E The holes are for the system speakers Attaching a ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 Attention Disconnect the AC power from your computer before you attach the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 The AC adapter connector will be damaged if it remains connected to the computer during the attachment You can hot attach or warm attach the computer to the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 Hot attach is attaching the computer to the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 while in operating mode warm attach is attaching the computer to the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 while in sleep standby mode In doing a hot or warm attach observe the following e For hot attaching The docking indicator of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 should turn on after a few seconds e For warm attaching When the computer returns from sleep standby mode the docking indicator of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 should turn on To attach your computer to a ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 do the following 1 Make sure that the system lock key of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 is in the unlocked vertical position Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer 151 2 Align the front of the computer with the front of the
160. eld Then type the new master hard disk password in the Enter New Password field and retype the password you just entered to verify it in the Confirm New Password field Press Enter and a Setup Notice window is displayed Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window The master hard disk password will be changed e To remove the master hard disk password type the current master hard disk password in the Enter Current Password field Then leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank and press Enter A Setup Notice window is displayed Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window Both the user and master hard disk passwords will be removed Supervisor password The supervisor password protects the system information stored in the ThinkPad Setup Without it no one can change the configuration of the computer It provides the following security features e f a supervisor password is set a password prompt appears when you try to start the ThinkPad Setup Unauthorized users cannot get access to configuration data e The system administrator can use the supervisor password to get access to a computer even if the user of that computer has set a power on password The supervisor password overrides the power on password e f both a supervisor password and a power on password are set you can do the following only if you have the supervisor password Deleting the power on password Changing or deleting the superv
161. eless WAN connections Wireless Wide Area Network wireless WAN enables you to establish wireless connections over remote public or private networks These connections can be maintained over a large geographical area such as a city or an entire country by use of multiple antenna sites or satellite systems maintained by wireless service providers Some ThinkPad notebooks come with a built in wireless WAN card integrating some wireless WAN technologies such as 1xEV DO HSPA 3G or GPRS You can connect to the Internet or your company network with the built in wireless WAN card and the configuration utility to make a wireless WAN connection and monitor its status Note Wireless WAN service is provided by authorized service providers in some countries To find the location of the wireless WAN antenna on your computer refer to Location of the UltraConnect wireless antennas on page 244 To use the wireless WAN feature start Access Connections For maximum performance from your wireless WAN connection please keep the following best usage guidelines in mind e Keep your notebook away from your body e Place your notebook on a flat surface and open your computer display to an angel of slightly more than 90 degrees e Place your notebook away from concrete or brick walls that may dampen cellular signals e Best reception will be available near windows and other locations where cellular phone reception is the strongest Using Bluet
162. em starts If the computer output does not appear on the DVI monitor do as follows For a computer that has the Intel display adapter 1 Press Ctrl Alt F12 The Intel Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for mobile window appears 2 Select Digital Display Intel Dual Display Clone or Extended Desktop If you select Digital Display the computer output appears on the DVI monitor only If you select Intel Dual Display Clone or Extended Desktop the output appears both on the computer display and on the DVI monitor 3 Click OK Considerations for attaching a DVI monitor Connect the DVI monitor to the expansion unit and turn it on before you turn on the computer Otherwise the system cannot recognize that the monitor is connected If the option for enabling the DVI monitor in the Display Properties window does not appear try closing the window and opening it again If the option still does not appear make sure that the connector of the monitor is attached firmly and repeat the procedure for attaching the monitor Using the DisplayPort connector Your computer has a DisplayPort connector the latest digital display interface for connection to various external devices such as CRT monitors projectors or even HDTV This compact connector enables a plug and play setup and supports adaptors that can plug into DVI VGA or HDMI ports The DisplayPort connector of your computer supports audio as well as video streaming Setting up a presentati
163. en the Display Properties window Click the Settings tab Check whether the screen resolution and color quality are correctly set Click Advanced Click the Adapter tab Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems 219 6 Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window Note The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer 7 Click the Properties button Check the Device status box and make sure the device is working properly If not click the Troubleshoot button 8 Click the Monitor tab Make sure the information is correct 10 Click the Properties button Check the Device status box and make sure the device is working properly If not click the Troubleshoot button e Problem Incorrect characters appear on the screen Solution Did you install the operating system or application program correctly If they are installed and configured correctly have the computer serviced e Problem The screen stays on even after you turn off your computer Solution Press and hold the power switch for 4 seconds or over to turn off your computer then turn it on again e Problem Missing discolored or bright dots appear on the screen every time you turn on your computer Solution This is an intrinsic characteristic of the TFT technology Your computer s display contains multiple thin film transistors TFTs A small number of missing d
164. enovo ThinkVantage Tools gt Tablet Utility For Windows Vista and Windows XP Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Tablet Shortcut Menu For details refer to the Help in the Tablet Shortcut Menu Special keys and buttons Your computer has several special keys and buttons 46 User Guide ThinkVantage button The blue ThinkVantage button can help you in many situations when your computer is working normally and even when it is not ThinkVantage You can also use the ThinkVantage button to interrupt the startup sequence of your computer and start the Rescue and Recovery workspace which runs independently of the Windows operating system and is hidden from it If Windows is not running properly you may need to do the following e Get the current system information e Rescue a file from your Windows environment or restore back up files provided you have made backups by use of the Rescue and Recovery program e Configure your computer or start the ThinkPad Setup All this can be achieved from the Rescue and Recovery workspace Turn on the computer then while the To interrupt normal startup press the blue ThinkVantage button message is displayed at the lower left of the screen press the ThinkVantage button The Rescue and Recovery screen opens Numeric keypad The keyboard has keys that when enabled work as a 10 key numeric keypad Chapter 2 Using your computer 47 To enable or disable t
165. entative to have the password canceled Chapter 4 Security 103 If you forget your hard disk password Lenovo cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced Proof of purchase is required and a fee will be charged for parts and service Setting the fingerprint reader If you want to change the settings of the fingerprint reader follow the procedure below The fingerprint submenu under the Security menu of the ThinkPad Setup offers the following choices e Predesktop Authentication Enables or disables fingerprint authentication before the operating system is loaded e Reader Priority Defines the priority for fingerprint readers if an external fingerprint reader is attached e Security Mode Specifies the settings of the security mode e Password Authentication Enables or disables password authentication Note This item appears if High security mode is selected e Reset Fingerprint Data By choosing this item you erase all of the fingerprint data stored in either the internal or external fingerprint reader To set an item in the fingerprint submenu 1 Print these instructions To configure the fingerprint reader you must turn your computer off and then on again Save all open files and exit all applications Turn your computer off and then on again When the logo screen is dis
166. equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than specified or recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Responsible Party Lenovo United States Incorporated 1009 Think Place Building O
167. er Using Bluetooth for the first time on your computer If this is the first time Bluetooth has been used on your computer follow either of the following procedures 1 Double click the My Bluetooth Places icon on the desktop or the Bluetooth icon in the task bar The Start Using Bluetooth window opens and some virtual device drivers are installed automatically 2 Wait until the installation of the drivers is complete OR 1 Right click the My Bluetooth Places icon on the desktop or the Bluetooth icon in the task bar 2 Select Start Using Bluetooth The Start Using Bluetooth window opens and some virtual device drivers are installed automatically 3 Wait until the installation of the drivers is complete Some other virtual device drivers will be installed on demand when you use certain Bluetooth profiles for the first time Using the Microsoft Bluetooth software If you are using Windows XP and want to use the Microsoft standard Bluetooth features install the software by following the instructions in Installing the Microsoft Bluetooth software in Windows XP on page 67 For information about how to use the Bluetooth function do as follows 1 Press Fn F5 to turn on Bluetooth Click Start gt Control Panel Click Printers and Other Hardware Click Bluetooth Devices Click the Options tab Click Learn more about Bluetooth Settings ona KR WwW PY Using ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Softw
168. er Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 181 4 Using the cursor keys move to an item you want to change When the item you want is highlighted press Enter A submenu is displayed 5 Change the items you wish to change To change the value of an item press If the item has a submenu you can display it by pressing Enter 6 Press Esc to exit from the submenu 7 If you are in a nested submenu press Esc repeatedly until you reach the ThinkPad Setup menu Note If you need to restore the settings to their original state as of the time of purchase press F9 to load the default settings You can also select an option in the Restart submenu to load the default settings or discard the changes 8 Select Restart Move the cursor to the option you want for restarting your computer then press Enter Your computer restarts Config menu If you need to change the configuration of your computer select Config from the ThinkPad Setup menu Notes e The default settings are already optimized for you If you consider changing the computer configuration proceed with extreme caution Setting the configuration incorrectly might cause unexpected results e In each submenu press the Enter key to show selectable options and select a desired option by using cursor key or type desired values from the keyboard directly The following submenu is displayed e Network Set the LAN related functions e U
169. er attempt to open or service any battery Do not crush puncture or incinerate batteries or short circuit the metal contacts Do not expose the battery to water or other liquids Only recharge the battery pack strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation Battery abuse or mishandling can cause the battery to overheat which can cause gasses or flame to vent from the battery pack or coin cell If your battery is damaged or if you notice any discharge from your battery or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads stop using the battery and obtain a replacement from the battery manufacturer Batteries can degrade when they are left unused for long periods of time For some rechargeable batteries particularly Lithium lon batteries leaving a battery unused in a discharged state could increase the risk of a battery short circuit which could shorten the life of the battery and can also pose a Safety hazard Do not let rechargeable Lithium lon batteries completely discharge or store these batteries in a discharged state Rechargeable battery notice Mroancen Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the battery pack Attempting to do so can cause an explosion or liquid leakage from the battery pack A battery pack other than the one specified by Lenovo or a disassembled or modified battery pack is not covered by the warranty If the rechargeable battery pack is incorrectly replaced there is danger o
170. er icon still does not appear on the task bar and the ac power indicator does not light up have the ac power adapter and your computer serviced Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model to display the power adapter power plug icon click Show hidden icons in the task bar Power problems Print these instructions now and keep it with your computer for reference later If your computer is getting no power at all check the following items 1 Verify the power switch Refer to Status indicators on page 18 The power switch is illuminated whenever the computer is on 2 Check all power connections Remove any power strips and surge protectors to connect the ac power adapter directly to the ac power outlet 3 Inspect the ac power adapter Check for any physical damage and make sure that the power cable is firmly attached to the adapter brick and the computer Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems 229 4 Verify the ac power source is working by attaching another device to the outlet 5 Remove the computer from a ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 Refer to Detaching a ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 on page 153 6 Remove all devices and then test for system power with minimal devices attached a Disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer Close the computer display and turn the computer over Remove the battery Refer to Replacing the battery on page 116 Remove the memory SO DIMM Re
171. er with one hand while using it in the tablet mode do not expose it to excessive vibration shock or rotation When using computer outdoors protect against exposure to rain or moisture If you put your computer in a carrying case put it into notebook mode and close the display Using the Tablet Digitizer Pen The Tablet Digitizer Pen and its accessories are shipped in a separate box within the ThinkPad shipping box You can use the pen to control your computer just as you would with a mouse or keyboard Note This pen is not waterproof Take care not to soak it or dip it in water You can store the pen in the slot on the right side of the ThinkPad Notebook Press it gently into the slot until you hear a click To remove the pen from its slot press it gently into the slot Jj to release it then pull it out H Chapter 2 Using your computer 43 Note The pen contains pressure sensors Do not push the tip of the pen for an extended period of time Do not subject the pen to shock or vibration The Tablet Digitizer Pen consists of a tip J a click button E and an eraser tip Hold the pen and point the tip at the display to move the cursor i To make a selection single click tap the display once with the pen To double click tap twice without pausing To do a right click tap the display once and then hold the tip of the pen on the display the right click icon appears Pressing the click button J is the same as a right
172. erating temperature is within the acceptable range Refer to Features on page 27 Specifications on page 30 and Operating environment on page 32 If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range have the computer serviced Problem The critical low battery error message appears and the computer immediately turns off Solution The battery power is getting low Connect the ac power adapter to the computer and plug it into an electrical outlet or replace the battery with a charged one Problem The computer display remains blank after you press Fn to return from sleep standby mode Solution Check whether an external monitor was disconnected or turned off while the computer was in sleep standby mode If you disconnected or turned off the external monitor connect it or turn it on before resuming the computer from the sleep standby mode When resuming the computer from the sleep standby mode without attaching the external monitor or turning it on and the computer display remains blank press Fn F7 to bring up the computer display Note If you are using Fn F7 to apply a presentation scheme you will need to press Fn F7 at least three times in three seconds to bring up the computer display Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model it does not support the presentation scheme Problem The computer does not return from sleep standby mode or the sleep standby indicator stays on and the compute
173. ernal fingerprint reader is used if attached Otherwise an internal fingerprint reader is used If Internal Only is selected an internal fingerprint reader is used Table 7 Security menu items continued submenuitem Selection Comments Security Mode e Normal If fingerprint authentication e High fails you can still start the computer by entering a password If you have selected Normal enter a power on password or a supervisor password if you have selected High enter a supervisor password Password Authentication e Disabled Enable or disable password e Enabled authentication If high security mode is selected this item appears Reset Fingerprint Data This option is used to erase all fingerprint data stored in the fingerprint reader and reset settings to the factory state ex Power on security LEDs etc As a result any power on security features previously enabled will not be able to work until they are re enabled in the fingerprint software Security Chip Security Chip e Active If you select Active e Inactive Security Chip is functional i If you select Inactive e Disabled Security Chip is visible but is not functional If you select Disabled Security Chip is hidden and is not functional Security Reporting Options Enable or disable the following Security Reporting Options e BIOS ROM String Reporting BIOS text string ESCD Reporting Extended system configuration
174. es To set your monitor type do as follows For Windows 7 1 Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet 2 Turn on the external monitor 72 User Guide 3 Right click on the desktop and click Screen resolution Note If your computer cannot detect the external monitor click the Detect button 4 Set Resolution 5 Click Advanced Settings 6 Click the Monitor tab Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type is correct If it is click OK to close the window otherwise do as follows 7 If more than two monitor types are displayed select Generic PnP Monitor or Generic Non PnP Monitor 8 Click Properties If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation 9 Click the Driver tab 10 Click Update Driver 11 Click Browse my computer for driver software and then click Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer 12 Clear the Show compatible hardware check box 13 Select Manufacturer and Model for your monitor If you cannot find your monitor in the list stop the installation of this driver and use the driver shipped with your monitor 14 After updating the driver click Close 15 Click OK Note To change the color settings right click on the desktop and click Screen resolution Click Advanced Settings select the Monitor tab then set Colors F
175. esponding item to eject the card from the Windows operating system 4 Press the card to eject it from your computer 5 Remove the card from your computer and store it safely for future use For Windows Vista and Windows XP 1 Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the task bar 2 Select corresponding item to eject the card from the Windows operating system 3 Press the card to eject it from your computer 4 Remove the card from your computer and store it safely for future use Note If you do not remove the card from your computer after you eject the card from the Windows operating system the card can no longer be accessed To access the card you must remove it once then insert it again Chapter 2 Using your computer 81 82 User Guide Chapter 3 You and your computer This chapter provides you information about accessibility and traveling with your computer This chapter contains the following topics e Accessibility and comfort on page 83 e Traveling with your computer on page 86 Accessibility and comfort Because your computer enables you to work in so many places it is important that you remain attentive to good posture good lighting and proper seating By keeping these considerations in mind you can improve performance and achieve greater comfort Lenovo is committed to providing the latest information and technology to our customers with disabilities Refer to our accessibility information which outl
176. et two passwords The user can change the user password later 9 If you select User Master go to step 12 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 If you select User only a new password window opens Type your new password in the Enter New Password field Notes e You can set the minimum length of a hard disk password in the ThinkPad Setup menu For details refer to Security menu on page 183 e If you set a hard disk password of over seven characters the hard disk drive can be used only with a computer that can recognize a hard disk password of over seven characters If you then install the hard disk drive in a computer that cannot recognize a hard disk password that contains more than seven characters you cannot get access to the drive Press Enter once to move to the next line Retype the password you just entered to verify it Go to step 18 to complete the procedure If you select User Master a message window opens and prompts you to set up a user hard disk password first Click Continue A new hard disk user password window opens Type your new password in the Enter New Password field Press Enter once to move to the next line Retype the password you just entered to verify it A message window opens and prompts you to set the master hard disk password Click Continue A new master hard disk password window opens Type your new password in the Enter New Password field Press Enter once to move
177. f an explosion The battery pack contains a small amount of harmful substances To avoid possible injury Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo Keep the battery pack away from fire Do not expose it to water or rain Do not attempt to disassemble it Do not short circuit it Keep it away from children Do not drop the battery pack Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills When disposing of the battery comply with local ordinances or regulations The battery pack should be stored at room temperature charged to approximately 30 to 50 of capacity We recommend that battery pack be charged about once per year to prevent overdischarge Copyright Lenovo 2011 xi Lithium coin cell battery notice nanoen Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced When replacing the lithium coin cell battery use only the same or an equivalent type that is recommended by the manufacturer The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used handled or disposed of Do not e Throw or immerse into water e Heat to more than 100 C 212 F e Repair or disassemble Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations The following statement applies to users in the state of California U S A California Perchlorate Information Products containing CR manganese dioxide lithium coin cell batteries may contain perchlorate Perchlorate Materi
178. fer to Replacing memory on page 143 oao oo Remove the PCI Express Mini Card Refer to Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN WiMAX connection on page 131 f Remove the hard disk drive and solid state drive Refer to Replacing the hard disk drive on page 125 and Replacing the solid state drive on page 128 g Wait for 30 seconds and then reinstall the SO DIMM and the known good battery or the ac power adapter to test the computer with minimal devices attached first h Reinstall each device one at a time that you have removed in the earlier steps If your computer does not run on battery power check the following items 1 Remove and reseat the battery to make sure that it is properly connected Refer to Replacing the battery on page 116 2 Swap batteries with another similar model if available If another similar ThinkPad model is available then verify that the battery pack works in the other computer and that the battery pack for the other model works in this computer 3 Verify the battery status indicator Refer to Status indicators on page 18 The battery status indicator is normally illuminated whenever the battery is installed and the computer is on or the ac power adapter is connected and the battery is charging This indicator may be blinking or solid in either orange or green color depending on the status of the battery A power button problem e Proble
179. g a fingerprint reader Using a fingerprint reader in ThinkPad X220 and X220i Using a fingerprint eader in ThinkPad x220 Tablet and X220i Tablet Notice on deleting data from your hard disk alive or solid state drive Using and understanding firewalls Protecting data against viruses Chapter 5 Recovery overview Creating and using recovery media Creating recovery media Using recovery media atin SY Performing backup and recovery operations Performing a backup operation Performing a recovery operation Using the Rescue and Recovery workspace Creating and using a rescue medium Creating arescue medium Using a rescue medium Reinstalling preinstalled applications d device drivers oe i ngi Solving recovery problems Chapter 6 Replacing devices Static electricity prevention Replacing the battery Replacing the keyboard Replacing the palm rest Replacing the hard disk drive Replacing the solid state drive Installing and replacing the PCI ESIOS Mini Card for wireless LAN WiMAX connection ii User Guide 83 84 85 85 86 86 86 89 89 89 90 90 90 91 93 95 96 97 97 100 105 106 106 107 107 108 108 109 109 109 110 111 111 111 112 113 115 115 116 118 122 125 128 131 Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless WAN connection 137 Installing and AE PETA the mSATA solid state drive i oo Shans
180. g the UltraNav pointing device on page 54 e Power management on page 58 e Connecting to the network on page 62 e Using a projector or external display on page 70 e Using audio features on page 77 e Using an integrated camera on page 78 e Using the ThinkLight feature on page 79 e Using the media card reader on page 79 Register your computer When you register your computer information is entered into a database which enables Lenovo to contact you in case of a recall or other severe problem In addition some locations offer extended privileges and services to registered users When you register your computer with Lenovo you will also receive the following benefits e Quicker service when you call Lenovo for help e Automatic notification of free software and special promotional offers Note When you are ready to register by modem you will need a phone connection to your computer and access to the World Wide Web To register your computer with Lenovo go to this Web site http www lenovo com register Then follow the instructions on the screen Frequently asked questions Here are a few tips that will help you optimize the use of ThinkPad notebook To ensure that you receive the best performance from your computer browse the following Web page to find information such as aids for troubleshooting and answers to frequently asked questions http www lenovo com support faq
181. ge 64 e Problem While looking at the Classic View of the Control Panel you see two Bluetooth icons in the Control Panel Solution If you have installed the Microsoft Bluetooth software before and you are using ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software you may find two Bluetooth icons in the Control Panel One is the Bluetooth Configuration icon for ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software and the other is the Bluetooth Devices icon for the Microsoft Bluetooth software e Problem Sound does not come from the Bluetooth headset headphone but comes from the local speaker even though the headset headphone is connected using Headset profile or AV profile Solution Do the following 1 Exit the application that uses the sound device for example Windows Media Player Open the Control Panel by clicking Start gt Control Panel Double click Sounds and Audio Devices to open the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties window Select the Audio tab If you are using Headset profile select Bluetooth Audio for both Sound playback and Sound recording If you are using AV profile select Bluetooth High Quality Audio for both Sound playback and Sound recording o A O N 6 Click OK to close the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties window Keyboard and other pointing devices The following are the most common keyboard and other pointing devices problems UltraNav problems e Problem The pointer drifts when the computer
182. gerprint Set the fingerprint reader related functions e Security Chip Set the security chip related functions e UEFI BIOS Update Option Specify the settings for Flash UEFI BIOS update e Memory Protection Specify the settings for the Data Execution Prevention feature e Virtualization Enable or disable the settings for Intel Virtualization Technology and Intel VT d Feature e 1 O Port Access Enable or disable the access to individual I O ports e Anti Theft Enable or disable UEFI BIOS interface to activate Anti Theft services such as Intel AT and Computrace To set a password related functions go to the Security menu and select Password The following submenu is displayed e Hardware Password Manager e Supervisor Password e Lock UEFI BIOS Settings e Set Minimum Length e Password at unattended boot e Password at restart e Power On Password e Hard Disk x Password Notes e Hard Disk 1 means the hard disk drive built into your computer e Hard Disk 2 appears on the Password submenu only if a hard disk drive is installed in the serial Ultrabay enhanced If you select and enable Hardware Password Manager you can manage your power on password supervisor password and your hard disk passwords by the management server By default this is set to Enabled Lock UEFI BIOS Settings enable or disable the function that protects items in the ThinkPad Setup from being changed by a user who does not have the supervisor password
183. grated wireless cards operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations Lenovo believes they are safe for use by consumers These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature In some situation or environment the use of integrated wireless cards may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization These situations and areas may for example include e Using the integrated wireless cards on board of airplanes in hospitals or near petrol stations blasting areas with electro explosive devices medical implants or body worn electronic medical devices e g pace makers e In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices in a specific organization e g airport or hospital you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use integrated wireless cards prior to turning on the computer Location of the UltraConnect wireless antennas ThinkPad models feature an integrated diversity antenna system built into the display for optimal reception enabling wireless communication wherever you are ThinkPad X220 and X220i 1 Wireless L
184. h Lenovo technologies advancing to provide you with the best engineered systems some models are equipped with a solid state drive SSD for data storage This cutting edge technology enables notebook computers to be lighter smaller and faster Note The hidden service partition is the reason why there is less free space than expected on your hard disk drive or SSD This reduction is more noticeable on the SSD because of its smaller capacity EJ Combo audio jack To listen to the sound from your computer connect a headphone or a headset that has a 3 5mm 4 pole plug to the combo audio jack 8 User Guide Notes e f you are using a headset with a function switch for example a headset for an iPhone mobile digital device do not press this switch while using the headset If you press it the headset microphone will be disabled and the internal microphone will be enabled instead e The combo audio jack does not support a conventional microphone For more information about the audio devices supported by the combo audio jack of your compute see Using audio features on page 77 J Ethernet connector Connect your computer to a LAN with the Ethernet connector bancer To avoid the risk of electrical shock do not connect the telephone cable to the Ethernet connector You can only connect an Ethernet cable to this connector Two indicators to the upper right and left of the connector show the status of the network connection
185. h until the machine turns off After the computer is turned off restart by pressing the power switch If the machine does not turn on continue to step 2 Note Do not remove the battery and ac power to reset the computer 2 While the machine is turned off remove all power sources from the computer battery and ac power Hold down the power button for 10 seconds Plug in the ac power while keeping the battery out of the computer If the computer does not turn back on continue to step 3 Note Once the computer starts up and enters Windows use the proper shutdown procedure to turn the computer off Once the machine is off reattach the battery and restart the computer If the computer does not start with the battery reattached remove the battery and again start with step 2 If the computer starts with ac power but does not start when the battery is attached call the Customer Support Center for support 3 While the machine is off remove all sources of power from the machine battery and ac power Remove all external devices that are attached to your computer keyboard mouse printer scanner etc Repeat step 2 If step 2 is unsuccessful continue to step 4 Note The following steps involve removing static sensitive components from your computer Please make sure that you are properly grounded and remove all sources of power attached to the computer If you are uncomfortable or unsure about removing components please call the Customer Su
186. he Fn F7 key combination may still be used to switch display output location Switching a display output location e Fn F7 For Windows 7 Switch between the computer display and an external monitor Windows will show these display options Computer display only LCD Computer display and external monitor same image Computer display and external monitor extended desktop function External monitor only Note To switch between the computer display and an external monitor the Win P key combination is also available For Windows Vista and Windows XP Switch between the computer display and an external monitor If an external monitor is attached computer output is displayed in the following three patterns by turns External monitor CRT display Computer display and external monitor LCD CRT display Computer display Notes This function is not supported if different desktop images are displayed on the computer display and the external monitor the Extend desktop function This function does not work while a DVD movie or a video clip is playing To enable this function start Presentation Director and change the settings Note Multiple users can log on to a single operating system by using different user IDs Each user needs to do the following Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage Presentation Director and change the Fn F7 Settings Enabling or disabling the wireless features e
187. he ac cord from it to avoid damaging the cord Note If you use the ThinkLight the battery life is slightly reduced Travel tips on airplanes If you carry your computer into an airplane check the travel tips Attention e For using onboard computer or wireless such as Internet Bluetooth etc service check the services with the airline before boarding the airplane e f there are restrictions on the use of computers with the wireless feature on an airplane you need to disable it before boarding To disable it refer to the instructions in Enabling or disabling the wireless feature on page 70 Follow the tips below 1 Be careful about the seat in front of you on airplanes Angle your computer display so that it does not get caught when the person in front of you leans back 2 Remember to hibernate or turn off your computer when taking off Travel accessories Here is a checklist of things to consider packing when you are going to be out of the office Travel Essentials e ThinkPad ac power adapter e External mouse if you are accustomed to using one e Ethernet cable e Standard phone cable and modular jack RJ 11 e Extra battery charged 86 User Guide e A quality carrying case that provides adequate cushion and protection If you are traveling to another country you might want to consider these items e Anac power adapter for the country that you are traveling to e An adapter to connect to a phone line in
188. he numeric keypad press and hold Shift or Fn and then press NmLk ScrLk Note The next drawing shows the locations of the keys that serve as the 10 key numeric keypad The locations of these keys are the same on every keyboard though for computers using different languages different characters are printed on the keytops If the numeric keypad is enabled press and hold Shift to use the cursor control and screen control keys temporarily Note The functions of the cursor and screen control keys are not printed on the keys 48 User Guide Function key combinations By setting the function keys you can change operational features instantly To use this function press and hold the Fn key ff then press one of the function keys E Power conservation Fn F3 Select a power plan in Windows XP power scheme that has been created by Power Manager or adjust the power level by using the slider control When you press this combination of buttons a panel for selecting a power plan in Windows XP power scheme or adjusting the power level appears Note If you have logged on with an administrator user ID in Windows XP and you press Fn F3 the panel for selecting a power scheme appears If you have logged on with another user ID in Windows XP and you press Fn F3 the panel does not appear e Fn F4 Put your computer in sleep standby mode To return to normal operation press the Fn key only without pressing a function key
189. headphone is attached the streaming is automatically redirected to it If you want to listen to sound from the speakers again be sure to set those speakers as the default device The procedure is as follows 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt All Control Panel Items 2 Click the SmartAudio icon The SmartAudio window opens 3 Look at the playback devices If you have attached a headphone the headphone will be automatically set as the default device and the icon for that headphone will be checked 4 To set a different device as the default just double click the icon for those speakers That icon will now have a check mark 5 Play any sound by use of a music program such as Windows Media Player Make sure that sound comes from the speakers For details refer to the Help for SmartAudio Fingerprint reader problems e Problem The surface of the reader is dirty stained or wet Solution Gently clean the surface of the reader with a dry soft lint free cloth e Problem The reader often fails to enroll or authenticate your fingerprint Solution If the surface of the reader is dirty stained or wet gently clean the surface of the reader with a dry soft lint free cloth If your finger has any of the following conditions you may not be able to register or authenticate it Your finger is wrinkled Your finger is rough dry or injured Your finger is very dry Your finger is stained with dirt mud or oil
190. her the color quality is correctly set make sure other information is also correct Click the Properties button If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation Check the Device status box and make sure the device is working properly If not click the Troubleshoot button For Windows Vista ar OO N Right click on the desktop and click Personalize Click Display Settings and check whether the screen resolution and color quality are correctly set Click Advanced Settings Click the Adapter tab Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window Note The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer Click the Properties button If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation Check the Device status box and make sure the device is working properly If not click the Troubleshoot button 7 Click the Monitor tab 8 Make sure the information is correct 9 Click the Properties button If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation Check the Device status box and make sure the device is working properly If not click the Troubleshoot button For Windows XP ar OO N Right click on the desktop and click Properties to op
191. ic electricity to build up around you e Always handle components carefully Handle adapters memory modules and other circuit boards by the edges Never touch exposed circuitry e Prevent others from touching components e When you install a static sensitive option or CRU touch the static protective package containing the part to a metal expansion slot cover or other unpainted metal surface on the computer for at least two seconds This reduces static electricity in the package and your body e When possible remove the static sensitive part from the static protective packaging and install the part without setting it down When this is not possible place the static protective packaging on a smooth level surface and place the part on it e Do not place the part on the computer cover or other metal surface Copyright Lenovo 2011 115 Replacing the battery Before you start print these instructions This system may not support batteries that are not genuine Lenovo made or authorized These systems will continue to boot but may not charge unauthorized batteries Attention Lenovo has no responsibility for the performance or safety of unauthorized batteries and provides no warranties for failures or damage arising out of their use To replace the battery with a new one read the following prerequisites and select your model from the list below for the instruction Prerequisites for the procedure nanan If the recharg
192. ications settings window the camera will be launched and the green camera in use indicator will turn on automatically In the Communications settings window you can preview your video image and take a snapshot of your current image 78 User Guide You can also use the integrated camera with other programs that provide features such as photographing video capturing and video conferencing To use the integrated camera with other programs open one of the programs and start the photographing video capturing or videoconferencing function Then the camera will start automatically and the green camera in use indicator will turn on For more information about using the camera with a program refer to the documentation that came with the program If you do not want the camera to be launched automatically when you press Fn F6 or when you use a program press Fn F6 to open the Communications settings window and click the Hide my camera image button to disable the camera Configuring camera settings You can configure the camera settings to meet your needs such as adjusting the quality of the video output To configure the camera settings do the following 1 Press Fn F6 The Communications settings window opens 2 Click the Manage Settings button The Communications Utility window opens 3 In the Communications Utility window configure the camera settings depending on your individual needs Using the ThinkLight feature You can use your
193. id subjecting your computer to extreme temperatures below 5 C 41 F or above 35 C 95 F e Some appliances such as certain portable desktop fans or air purifiers can produce negative ions If a computer is close to such an appliance and is exposed for an extended time to air containing negative ions it may become electrostatically charged Such a charge may be discharged through your hands when you touch the keyboard or other parts of the computer or through connectors on I O devices connected to it Even though this kind of electrostatic discharge ESD is the opposite of a discharge from your body or clothing to the computer it poses the same risk of a computer malfunction Your computer is designed and manufactured to minimize any effects of electrostatic charge An electrostatic charge above a certain limit however can increase the risk of ESD Therefore when using the computer close to an appliance that can produce negative ions give special attention to the following e Avoid directly exposing your computer to the air from an appliance that can produce negative ions e Keep your computer and peripherals as far as possible from such an appliance e Wherever possible ground your computer to facilitate safe electrostatic discharge Note Not all such appliances cause a significant electrostatic charge Be gentle with your computer e Avoid placing any objects including paper between the display and the keyboard or the palm rest
194. ight have one or more audio input connectors To project sound you will need to attach the combo audio jack on your computer to these connectors using an audio cable commercially available Using dual displays Using the Extend desktop function Your computer supports a function named the Extend desktop With the Extend desktop function you can display output on both the computer display and an external monitor You can also display different desktop images on each monitor You can use the Extend desktop function without changing any settings If the function does not work refer to Enabling the Extend desktop function on page 76 to enable it Considerations for using the Extend desktop function e If you want to show DOS full screen while in the Extend desktop mode only the primary display shows DOS the other display is blacked out If your computer has the Intel display adapter you can designate the other display as the primary display by doing the following 1 Press Ctrl Alt F12 The Intel CUI window opens 2 Select Extended Desktop 3 Change the setting to designate the primary display e When an application using the DirectDraw or the Direct3D is played in full screen mode it is shown only on the primary display e You cannot use the display switching function when you are in the Extend desktop mode Enabling the Extend desktop function To enable the Extend desktop function do as follows For Windows 7 1 Connec
195. image is shifted to left or right on the screen To correct this first make sure that your external monitor supports the display mode that is the resolution and the refresh rate that you have set If it does not set a display mode that the monitor supports If it does support the display mode you have set go to the setup menu for the monitor itself and adjust the settings there Usually the external monitor has buttons for access to the setup menu For details see the reference manual for the monitor Audio problems e Problem Wave or MIDI sound does not play correctly Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems 225 Solution Make sure the built in audio device is configured correctly For Windows 7 and Windows Vista 1 2 3 Click Start gt Control Panel Click Hardware and Sound Click Device Manager If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation Double click Sound video and game controllers in Windows Vista click the mark for Sound video and game controllers Make sure the following device is enabled and configured correctly Conexant CX20672 SmartAudio HD For Windows XP oak whnr Click Start gt Control Panel Click Performance and Maintenance Click System Click the Hardware tab and then click the Device Manager button Click the mark for Sound video and game controllers Make sure the following device is en
196. in information such as user IDs passwords and other personal information To open Password Manager do the following e For Windows 7 See Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 e For Windows Vista and Windows XP Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Password Manager Power Manager The Power Manager program provides convenient flexible and complete power management for your computer By using the Power Manager program you can adjust your power settings to give you the best balance between performance and power saving To open Power Manager do the following e For Windows 7 See Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 e For Windows Vista and Windows XP Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Power Manager 36 User Guide Product Recovery This program enables you to create recovery media to restore the contents of the system drive or hard disk drive to the same state as when the computer was originally shipped from the factory For information about how to open and use this program refer to Creating and using recovery media on page 107 Presentation Director Presentation Director is a display configuration utility that enables you to give presentations conveniently It also enables you to create and manage the display schemes However by default Presentation Director has some predefined presentation schemes You can apply them to your presentation with no need
197. in touch pad Note If you want to use an external mouse select Disabled Fn and Ctrl Key swap Disabled If you select Enabled the Enabled Fn key works as the Ctrl key and the Ctrl key works as the Fn key Note Even when Enabled is selected you need to press the Fn key to return the computer from sleep mode to normal operation Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 187 Table 6 Config menu items continued Fn Key Lock e Disabled e Enabled ThinkPad NumLock e Independent e Synchronized Power On NumLock e Automatic e On e Off 188 User Guide If you select Enabled you can press the Fn key to keep it in a pressed condition and then press the desired function key The action is equivalent to pressing the required key and the Fn key simultaneously If you press the Fn key twice the state is locked until you press the Fn key again If you select Independent NumLock on your computer can be disabled independently regardless of the NumLock state of the external keyboard If NumLock on the computer is enabled NumLock on the external keyboard will also be enabled If you select Synchronized NumLock on your computer and NumLock on the external keyboard are synchronized If you select Automatic NumLock is enabled when full size keyboard is attached If you select On NumLock is always enabled If you select Off NumLock is always disabl
198. increase it by pressing the Fn Home Type the correct password and press Enter refer to Power on password If these items are properly set and the screen remains blank have the computer serviced e Problem When turn on the machine only a white cursor appears on a blank screen Solution If you have modified a partition on your hard disk drive or solid state drive by using a partition software information about that partition or the master boot record may have been destroyed 1 Turn off the computer and then turn it on again 2 If you still see only the cursor on the screen do the following Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems 211 If you have used the partition software examine the partition on the hard disk drive or solid state drive by using the software and recover the partition if required Use either the Rescue and Recovery workspace or the recovery discs to restore the system to the factory state For details about restoring the system to the factory state see Creating and using recovery media on page 107 If the problem persists have the computer serviced e Problem My screen goes blank while the computer is on Solution Your screen saver or power management may be enabled Do either of the following Touch the TrackPoint or the touch pad or press a key to exit the screen saver Press the power switch to resume from sleep standby or hibernation Beep errors Table 9 Beep
199. indows 7 1 Open Control Panel 2 Click Hardware and Sound 3 Click Device Manager If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation 4 From the Action menu select Add legacy hardware The Add Hardware Wizard starts 5 Follow the instructions on the screen e For Windows Vista and Windows XP Open Control Panel and switch to Classic view Double click the Add Hardware icon The Add Hardware Wizard starts Follow the instructions on the screen 80 User Guide Removing an ExpressCard a flash media card or a smart card Attention Before removing a storage ExpressCard such as a flash memory ExpressCard a solid state ExpressCard or a memory card reader ExpressCard from an ExpressCard slot you must stop the ExpressCard Otherwise data on the ExpressCard might be corrupted or lost Attention Do not remove an ExpressCard while the computer is in sleep standby mode or hibernation mode If you do the system will not respond when you try to resume operation For information about the location of the ExpressCard slot flash media card reader slot and smart card slot see Locating computer controls connectors and indicators on page 1 To remove an ExpressCard a flash media card or a smart card do the following For Windows 7 1 Click the Show hidden icons in the task bar 2 Right click Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon 3 Select corr
200. ines our efforts in this area Ergonomic information Working in the virtual office may mean adapting to frequent changes in your environment Following some simple rules will make things easier and bring you the maximum benefits of your computer Keeping in mind such basics as good lighting and proper seating for example can help you improve your performance and achieve greater comfort Note This example shows someone in a conventional setting Even when not in such a setting you can follow many of these tips Develop good habits and they will serve you well General Posture Below are some general recommendations for assuming a healthy working posture It is best to periodically make minor modifications in your working posture to deter the onset of discomfort caused by long periods of working in the same position Frequent short breaks from your work will also help to prevent any minor discomfort associated with your working posture Display Position the display to maintain a comfortable viewing distance of 510 760 mm 20 30 inch Avoid glare or reflections on the display from overhead lighting or outside sources of light Keep the display screen Copyright Lenovo 2011 83 clean and set the brightness to levels that enable you to see the screen clearly Press Fn Home or End to adjust display brightness Head Position Keep your head and neck in a comfortable and neutral vertical or upright position Chair Use a chair that
201. inkPad X220 and X220i features Processor Features e See the system properties of your computer You can do this as follows Click Start right click Computer in Windows XP My Computer then from the pull down menu select Properties Memory e Double data rate 3 DDR3 synchronous dynamic random access memory Storage device e 2 5 inch 76 mm solid state drive or 2 5 inch 64 mm hard disk drive e mSATA solid state drive on some models Chapter 1 Product Overview 27 Display The color display uses TFT technology e Size 12 5 inch 817 5 mm e Resolution LCD 1366 by 768 External monitor Up to 2560 by 1600 e LED backlight e Brightness control e ThinkLight Keyboard e 89 key 90 key or 94 key e UltraNav TrackPoint and multi touch touch pad e Fn key function e ThinkVantage button e Volume control buttons e Speaker mute button e Microphone mute button Interface e External monitor connectors e Combo audio jack stereo headphone or headset e 3 Universal Serial Bus USB connectors e RJ45 Ethernet connector e ExpressCard slot e 4 in 1 digital media card reader e Docking connector e DisplayPort connector Optical drive in ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 e DVD drive e DVD Multi Burner drive Wireless features e Integrated wireless LAN on some models e Integrated Bluetooth on some models e Integrated wireless WAN on some models e Integrated WiMAX on some models Security feature
202. ion to the device e Problem Your computer is connected to a Bluetooth enabled device but you cannot use any of the services of that device Solution Make sure that the device is enabled for the Bluetooth connection 1 Double click the My Bluetooth Places icon 2 Go to Bluetooth Tasks and click View devices in range If you cannot find the device it may have stopped responding Make sure that it is enabled for the Bluetooth connection If you find it connect to the services you want If you are sure that the device is responding turn the Bluetooth power off and then on again or restart your computer Then try to connect again e Problem You cannot pull a business card from the connected computer Solution Make sure that the connected computer has its own default business card application and that the card is ready for communication Make sure that the security settings on the connected computer allow you to download the business card e Problem You cannot send a business card to the connected computer Solution Make sure that your computer has its own default business card application and that the card is ready for communication Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems 215 Make sure that the security settings on the connected computer allow you to upload your business card e Problem Your computer is connected to a Bluetooth enabled computer that works as an FTP server but you cannot see any files in the FTP serve
203. ion with xxx Bluetooth device name failed PIM Personal Information Manager Interface failed Solution Start a mail application and set up your e mail account OR modify the Bluetooth configuration so as not to synchronize e mail items as follows 1 Double click My Bluetooth Places 2 Click Bluetooth and select Bluetooth Setup Wizard 3 Select want to configure the Bluetooth services that this computer will provide to remote devices and click Next 4 Select PIM Synchronization and click Configure 5 Select Do Not Synchronize in the e mail synchronization selection and click OK 6 Click Finish to close the Bluetooth Service Selection window e Problem ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software does not function Solution Do the following 1 Turn on Bluetooth by pressing Fn F5 Click Start gt Control Panel Click the Performance and Maintenance icon Click the System icon Click the Hardware tab Click the Device Manager button The Device Manager window opens NO OO fF W PY Check whether the words Bluetooth Device appear in the device listing in the window 216 User Guide If the words Bluetooth Radio appear in the device listing the Microsoft Bluetooth software is installed on your computer If you want to use ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software you have to install it and then replace the Bluetooth driver For more information see Using Bluetooth on pa
204. is eligible for a warranty replacement ThinkPad X220 Tabet and X220i Tablet specifications Size e Width 305 0 mm 12 inch e Depth 228 7 mm 9 inch e Height 27 to 31 3 mm 1 06 inch to 1 23 inch Environment e Maximum altitude without pressurization 3048 m 10 000 ft e Temperature At altitudes up to 2438 m 8000 ft Operating 5 0 C to 35 0 C 41 F to 95 F Non operating 5 0 C to 43 0 C 41 F to 109 F At altitudes above 2438 m 8000 ft Maximum temperature when operating under the unpressurized condition 31 3 C 88 F Note When you charge the battery pack its temperature must be at least 10 C 50 F e Relative humidity Operating 8 to 80 Non operating 5 to 95 Heat output e 65 W 222 Btu hr maximum or 90 W 807 Btu hr maximum depending on the model Power source ac power adapter e Sine wave input at 50 to 60 Hz e Input rating of the ac power adapter 100 to 240 V AC 50 to 60 Hz Battery pack e Lithium ion Li lon battery pack Battery life e For percentage of remaining battery power see the Power Manager Battery Gauge in the task bar e The Power Manager also displays a green yellow and red indication A battery under warranty with a red indication is eligible for a warranty replacement Chapter 1 Product Overview 31 Operating environment This section provides information about your computer operating environment Environment e Maximum altitude w
205. is excellent Power to the wireless radio is on The signal strength of the wireless connection is marginal Power to the wireless radio is on The signal strength of the wireless connection is poor To improve signal strength move your system closer to the wireless access point e Wireless status icon states wireless WAN Power to the WAN radio is off No association No signal Signal level 1 Signal level 2 Signal level 3 Note If you have trouble in making a connection try moving your computer closer to your wireless access point Chapter 2 Using your computer 69 Enabling or disabling the wireless feature To enable or disable the wireless feature press Fn F5 A list of wireless features is displayed You can turn the feature on and off with a single click You can also enable or disable the feature by the following procedures To enable the wireless feature do as follows 1 Click the Access Connections wireless status icon in the system tray 2 Click Power On Wireless Radio To disable the wireless feature do as follows 1 Click the Access Connections wireless status icon in the system tray 2 Click Power Off Wireless Radio Notes e You can use the wireless radio switch to disable the wireless radio of all the wireless devices on your computer e f your computer is a Windows 7 model to display the Access Connections status icon and the wireless status icon in the system tray refer to the Access
206. iscolored or bright dots on the screen might exist all the time External monitor problems e Problem The external monitor is blank Solution To bring up the image press Fn F7 and select the desired monitor If the problem persists do the following 1 Connect the external monitor to another computer to make sure it works 2 Reconnect the external monitor to your computer 3 Refer to the manual shipped with the external monitor to check the resolutions and refresh rates that are supported If the external monitor supports the same resolution as the computer display or a higher resolution view output on the external monitor or on both the external monitor and the computer display If the external monitor supports a lower resolution than the computer display view output on the external monitor only If you view output on the both the computer display and the external monitor the external monitor screen will be blank or distorted e Problem You cannot set a higher resolution than the present one on your external monitor Solution Make sure that monitor information is correct Do the following For Windows 7 1 Right click on the desktop and click Screen resolution Note If your computer cannot detect the external monitor click the Detect button 2 Click the icon for the desired monitor the Monitor 2 icon is for the external monitor 3 Click Advanced Settings 4 Click the Adapter tab 220 User Guide 5
207. isor password Enabling or disabling the Wake on LANand Flash over LAN features Enabling or disabling the Internal Network Option ROM feature Changing date and time Enabling or disabling the Lock UEFI BIOS Setting feature Enabling or disabling the Password at unattended boot Specifying the minimum length for power on passwords and hard disk passwords Changing the setting for the security chip Enabling or disabling the Boot Device List F12 Option Enabling or disabling the Boot Order Lock Chapter 4 Security 93 Enabling or disabling the Flash BIOS Updating by End Users feature Enabling or disabling the Internal Network device Enabling or disabling the Internal Wireless device Enabling or disabling the Internal Bluetooth device Enabling or disabling the Internal Wireless WAN device Enabling or disabling the Security mode Enabling or disabling the Reader priority Erasing the fingerprint data Notes e The system administrator can set the same supervisor password on many ThinkPad notebooks to make administration easier e By enabling the Lock UEFI BIOS Settings in the Password menu when you set the supervisor password you make it impossible for anyone but you to make changes Setting a supervisor password Only a system administrator will be able to apply this procedure 1 Print these instructions Save all open files and exit all applications Turn your com
208. it easier for you to use the computer display To enable the FullScreen Magnifier function press Fn Spacebar The active window is magnified and the FullScreen Magnifier icon is displayed in the system tray at bottom right of your screen Then you can change the zoom resolution Click the FullScreen Magnifier icon and make your choice Chapter 3 You and your computer 85 To disable the FullScreen Magnifier function click the FullScreen Magnifier icon and select Exit or press Fn Spacebar Traveling with your computer When you travel abroad your computer can help you feel more at home and at ease With your own computer and its files you can be confident about gathering and offering information to clients and coworkers Attending to some important details that can help foreign travel go smoothly e Travel tips on page 86 e Travel accessories on page 86 Travel tips Use the following travel tips to travel more confidently and efficiently with your computer 1 While it is safe to allow your computer to go through the x ray machines at airport security stations it is important to keep your eyes on the computer at all times to prevent theft 2 Consider bringing an airplane or automobile adapter for your computer 3 Because you might need to use your computer in less than perfect lighting conditions turn on the ThinkLight by pressing Fn PgUp to illuminate the keyboard 4 If you carry an ac power adapter detach t
209. ithout pressurization 3048 m 10 000 ft e Temperature At altitudes up to 2438 m 8000 ft Operating 5 0 C to 35 0 C 41 F to 95 F Non operating 5 0 C to 43 0 C 41 F to 109 F At altitudes above 2438 m 8000 ft Maximum temperature when operating under the unpressurized condition 31 3 C 88 F Note When you charge the battery pack its temperature must be at least 10 C 50 F e Relative humidity Operating 8 to 80 Non operating 5 to 95 If possible place your computer in a well ventilated and dry area without direct exposure to sunshine Keep electrical appliances such as an electric fan radio high powered speakers air conditioner and microwave oven away from your computer because the strong magnetic fields generated by these appliances can damage the monitor and data on the hard disk drive or solid state drive Do not place any beverages on top of or beside the computer or other attached devices If liquid is spilled on or in the computer or an attached device a short circuit or other damage might occur Do not eat or smoke over your keyboard Particles that fall into your keyboard can cause damage ThinkVantage technologies and software Lenovo preinstalls on your PC useful and helpful software applications to help you get started to stay productive while on the move and to keep you and your computer working Lenovo offers enhanced security wireless computing data migration and other solu
210. ium ion Li ion battery pack provided with it or from ac power through the ac power adapter While you use ac power the battery charges automatically The ac power adapter that comes with your computer has two basic components 1 The transformer pack that converts ac power adapter for use with the computer 2 The power cord that plugs into the AC outlet and into the transformer pack Attention Using an improper power cord could cause severe damage to your computer To use the ac power adapter do the following Be sure to take these steps in the order in which they are given here 1 Connect the ac power adapter to the power jack of the computer 2 Connect the power cord to the transformer pack 3 Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet You can check the status of your battery at any time by looking at the battery meter at the bottom of your display Notes e When the ac power adapter is not in use disconnect it from the electrical outlet e Do not bind the power cord tightly around the ac power transformer pack when it is connected to the transformer e You can charge the battery when the ac power adapter is connected to the computer and the battery is installed You need to charge it in any of the following conditions When you purchase a new battery If the battery status indicator starts blinking 58 User Guide If the battery has not been used for a long time Before you charge the battery make sure
211. ke TTA4T Replacingmemory 148 Replacing the SIM card 146 Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer 2 2 149 Finding ThinkPad options 149 ThinkPad Ultrabase Series3 149 ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 top view 150 ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 bottom view 151 Attaching a ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 151 Detaching a ThinkPad Ultrabase Series3 153 Security feature 2 1 154 ThinkPad Battery 19 155 Top view 156 Bottom view 2 1 156 Attaching a ThinkPad Battery 194 z ae dean 156 Detaching a ThinkPad Battery 19 157 Charging a ThinkPad Battery 19 158 ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 and ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus SOMES 3 ox wo Sale ee OP ed pe ee he See DG Front view 2 160 Rearview 163 Attaching a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series3 166 Detaching a ThinkPad Port Replicator Sanos 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 and ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series3 168 Security feature pasts 2 S Ae 100 Using the system lock kay btew e Goble E I Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 173 Installing anew operating system 173 Before you begin 178 Installing Windows 7 174 Installing Windows Vista 175 Installing Win
212. l Serial Bus connectors are used for connecting devices compatible with a USB interface such as a printer or a digital camera Notes e Your computer may look slightly different from the illustrations e Your computer is compatible with USB 1 1 and 2 0 Some models are also compatible with USB 3 0 e f your computer is a USB 3 0 model any function specific to USB 3 0 will not work until your Windows operating system has been started However USB 2 0 or 1 0 devices will work Fan louvers left The internal fan and louvers enable air to circulate in the computer and cool the central processor Note To avoid impeding airflow do not place any obstacle in front of the fan Bottom view This section provides bottom view for your computer ThinkPad X220 and X220i bottom view Figure 7 Bottom view Battery H SIM card slot EJ Docking connector EJ Memory upgrade slot H Built in stereo speakers Chapter 1 Product Overview 15 Battery Use your computer with battery power whenever ac power is unavailable For details refer to the instructions in Power Manager on page 36 H SIM card slot If your computer has a wireless WAN feature it may require a SIM Subscriber Identification Module card to establish a wireless WAN Wide Area Network connections Depending on the country of delivery the SIM card may be already installed in the SIM card slot EJ Docking connector With a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad
213. lid state drive SSD Your computer might include a PCI Express Mini Card in the PCI Express Mini Card slot which enables wireless WAN communications With Lenovo technologies advancing to provide you with the best engineered systems some models are equipped with an mSATA solid state drive for data storage This cutting edge technology enables notebook computers to be lighter smaller and faster TrackPoint pointing stick TrackPoint buttons Touch pad The keyboard contains the unique TrackPoint pointing device Pointing selecting and dragging are all part of a single process that you can perform without moving your fingers from typing position Move your fingertip across the UltraNav touch pad to move the pointer The TrackPoint and TrackPoint buttons provide functions similar to those of a mouse and its buttons CapsLock indicator The indicator of CapsLock is located on the CapsLock key For more information about CapsLock indicator see ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet status indicators on page 21 Fn key Use the Fn key to take advantage of ThinkPad functions such as turning on the ThinkLight To use ThinkPad functions press Fn the required function key marked in blue Volume control buttons The built in volume buttons enable you to quickly adjust the volume or mute the sound from your computer For details refer to the instructions in Volume and mute buttons on page 52 System and power status indicat
214. lied with the application If the application still does not run correctly contact your place of purchase or a service representative for help Ports and connectors This section includes the most common ports and connectors problems Universal Serial Bus and docking station or port replication Universal Serial Bus problems e Problem A device connected to the USB connector does not work Solution Open the Device Manager window Make sure that the USB device setup is correct and that the assignment of computer resource and the installation of the device driver are correct For Windows 7 and Windows Vista 1 Click Start gt Control Panel 2 Click Hardware and Sound 3 Click Device Manager If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation For Windows XP 1 Click Start gt Control Panel 2 Click Performance and Maintenance and click System 3 Click the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button Refer to Diagnosing problems on page 207 and run Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox for a diagnostic test of the USB connector A docking station or port replicator problem e Problem The computer does not start when you try to turn it on and does not respond when you try to resume operation Solution Make sure that The ac power adapter is connected to the docking station or the port replicator The docking indicator of the ThinkPad Mini Dock P
215. lies with the specifications of EN 50332 1 If different headphones or earphones are used ensure that they comply with EN 50332 1 Clause 6 5 Limitation Values Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332 1 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels Additional safety information bancer Plastic bags can be dangerous Keep plastic bags away from babies and children to avoid danger of suffocation Notice for Tablet PC users Safety Notice for users in Australia r ee Do not connect phone line while using tablet mode Notice for users in the U S A Many PC products and accessories contain cords cables or wires such as power cords or cords to connect the accessory to a PC If this product has such a cord cable or wire then the following warning applies WARNING Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with this product will expose you to lead a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Save these instructions Copyright Lenovo 2011 XV xvi User Guide Chapter 1 Product Overview This chapter provides information about the locations of connectors locating important product information computer features specifications operating environment and preinstalled software programs This chapter contains the following topics Locating computer controls connectors features
216. ling their IT products Information on product recycling offerings can be found on Lenovo s Internet site at http www pc ibm com ww lenovo about environment EU WEEE statements EU Only The Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE mark applies only to countries within the European Union EU and Norway Appliances are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002 96 EC concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable throughout the European Union This label is applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive Users of electrical and electronic equipment EEE with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the WEEE Directive must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste but use the collection framework available to them for the return recycle recovery of WEEE and minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the presence of hazardous substances For additional WEEE information go to http Awww lenovo com lenovo environment Japan recycling statements Collecting and recycling a disused Lenovo computer or monitor If you are a company employee and need to dispose of a Lenovo computer or monitor that is the property of the company you must do so in accordance with the Law for Promo
217. ll circle above the reader Make sure that the entire top joint of the finger is on the reader To swipe your finger over the reader in tablet mode do as follows 102 User Guide 1 Place the ball of your finger that is the central part of the fingerprint on the small circle above the reader Make sure that the entire top joint of the finger is on the reader 2 Apply light pressure and swipe your finger across the reader in one smooth motion Logging on to the system After you enroll your fingerprint log on to the system as follows 1 Set a Power on password or a Hard disk security or both 2 Turn your computer off and then on again 3 When prompted swipe your finger over the reader 4 On request type your power on password your hard disk password or both The enrolled fingerprint is now associated with your power on password your hard disk password or both The next time you start the computer you can log on to the system by swiping your finger over the reader once Attention If you always use your fingerprint to log on to the system you may forget your password Write down your password and keep it in a safe place If you forget it and for some reason you cannot swipe your finger across the reader for example if you injure that finger you cannot start the computer or change the password If you forget your power on password you must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing repres
218. load these devices If power strips are used the load should not exceed the power strip input rating Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads power requirements and input ratings Copyright Lenovo 2011 ix Plugs and outlets Mroancen If a receptacle power outlet that you intend to use with your computer equipment appears to be damaged or corroded do not use the outlet until it is replaced by a qualified electrician Do not bend or modify the plug If the plug is damaged contact the manufacturer to obtain a replacement Do not share an electrical outlet with other home or commercial appliances that draw large amounts of electricity otherwise unstable voltage might damage your computer data or attached devices Some products are equipped with a three pronged plug This plug fits only into a grounded electrical outlet This is a safety feature Do not defeat this safety feature by trying to insert it into a non grounded outlet If you cannot insert the plug into the outlet contact an electrician for an approved outlet adapter or to replace the outlet with one that enables this safety feature Never overload an electrical outlet The overall system load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads and branch circuit ratings Be sure that the power outlet you are using is properly wired easily
219. lus Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 is on The computer is securely attached to the docking station or the port replicator Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems 233 234 User Guide Chapter 11 Getting support There is more to owning a ThinkPad notebook than having a powerful portable computer This chapter offers information about when to communicate with Lenovo and how best to do it e Before you contact Lenovo on page 235 e Getting help and service on page 236 e Purchasing additional services on page 241 Before you contact Lenovo Often you can solve your computer problems by referring to the information in the explanations of error codes running Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox or by consulting the ThinkPad Web site Register your computer Register your ThinkPad products with Lenovo Go to http www lenovo com register This can help authorities return your computer to you if it is lost or stolen Registering your computer also enables Lenovo to notify you about possible technical information and upgrades For more information about registering your computer refer to Register your computer on page 39 Download system updates Downloading updated software might resolve problems you experience with your computer To download updated software go to http www lenovo com support site wss document do sitestyle lenovo amp lndocid tpad matrix Then follow the instructions on th
220. m The system does not respond and you cannot turn off the computer Solution Turn off the computer by pressing and holding the power button for 4 seconds or more If the system is still not reset remove the ac power adapter and the battery Startup problems Print these instructions now and keep them with your computer for reference later If you receive an error message before the operating system loads check the following item e Follow the appropriate corrective actions for Power on self test error messages If you receive an error message while the operating system is loading the desktop configuration after the POST is completed check the following items 1 Visit the Lenovo Support Web site at http www lenovo com support and search for the error message 2 Visit the Microsoft Knowledge Base homepage at http support microsoft com and search for the error message Sleep standby and hibernation problems e Problem The computer enters sleep standby mode unexpectedly 230 User Guide Solution If the processor overheats the computer automatically enter sleep standby mode to allow the computer to cool and to protect the processor and other internal components Check the settings for sleep standby mode using Power Manager Problem The computer enters sleep standby mode the sleep standby indicator turns on immediately after Power on self test Solution Make sure that The battery is charged The op
221. m the telephone outlet on the wall T eee Electric current from power telephone and communication cables is hazardous To avoid shock hazard disconnect the cables before opening the cover of this slot Attention Before you start installing a PCI Express Mini Card touch a metal table or a grounded metal object This action reduces any static electricity from your body The static electricity could damage the card Your computer has a PCI Express Mini Card slot for connection to a wireless LAN WiMAX To replace the PCI Express Mini Card with a new one follow the procedure below Replacing a PCI Express Mini Card with two connectors 1 Turn off the computer then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer Wait for a few minutes till the inside of the computer cools before you start the following procedures Close the computer display and turn the computer over Remove the battery For details refer to the instructions in Remove the battery on page 116 Remove the keyboard For details refer to the instructions in Remove the keyboard on page 118 a A WwW DY Remove the palm rest For details refer to the instructions in Remove the palm rest on page 122 Chapter 6 Replacing devices 131 6 If a tool for removing connectors is included in the package with the new card use it to disconnect the cables from the card If no such tool is included disconnect the cables by picking up the con
222. mentation nanoen Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills When disposing of the battery comply with local ordinances or regulations and your company s safety standards nanoen There is a danger of an explosion if the backup battery is incorrectly placed The lithium battery contains lithium and can explode if it is not properly handled or disposed of Replace only with a battery of the same type To avoid possible injury or death Do not 1 throw or immerse into water 2 allow it to heat to more than 100 C 212 F or 3 attempt to repair or disassemble it Dispose of it as required by local ordinances or regulations and your company s safety standards Connecting to the network Your computer has one or more network adapters for connecting to the Internet and to your company s wired LAN or wireless LAN network Note Some models come with a built in wireless WAN card enabling you to establish wireless connections over remote public or private networks Access Connections on page 34 is a connectivity assistant program for creating and managing location profiles Each location profile stores all the network and Internet configuration settings needed for connecting to a network infrastructure from a specific location such as a home or an office Your modem enables you to connect to your network or the Internet from almost anywhere If your network has a phone line or lines dedicat
223. monitor to an electrical outlet Turn on the external monitor and the computer Press Fn F7 to change the display output location to the external monitor Note After pressing Fn F7 you will need to wait for a moment before the image appears Right click on the desktop and click Personalize Click Display Settings Click the Advanced Settings button Click the Monitor tab Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type is correct If it is click OK to close the window otherwise do as follows If more than one monitor type is displayed select Generic PnP Monitor or Generic Non PnP Monitor Click Properties If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation Click the Driver tab Click Update Driver Click Browse my computer for driver software and then click Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer Clear the Show compatible hardware check box Select Manufacturer and Model for your monitor After updating the driver click Close Set Resolution and Colors in the Display Settings window Click OK Windows XP Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet Turn on the external monitor and the computer Press Fn F7 to change the display output location to the external monitor Note After pressing Fn F7 you will need to wait for
224. n If you need updated device drivers do not download them from the Windows Update Web site Obtain them from Lenovo For more information see Making sure device drivers are current on page 202 Solving recovery problems If you are unable to access the Rescue and Recovery workspace or the Windows environment do one of the following e Use arescue medium to start the Rescue and Recovery workspace See Using a rescue medium on page 111 e Use recovery media if all other methods of recovery have failed and you need to restore the hard disk drive to the factory default settings See Using recovery media on page 108 Note If you are unable to access the Rescue and Recovery workspace or the Windows environment from a rescue medium or recovery media you might not have the rescue device an internal hard disk drive a disc a USB hard disk drive or other external devices set as the first boot device in the startup device sequence You must first make sure that your rescue device is set as the first boot device in the startup device sequence in the Setup Utility program See Startup menu on page 184 for detailed information about temporarily or permanently changing the startup device sequence For more information about the Setup Utility program see ThinkPad Setup on page 181 It is important to create a rescue medium and a set of recovery media as early as possible and store them in a safe place for future use
225. n The computer cannot enter hibernation mode lf the hibernation mode is not enabled in Windows XP To enable it do as follows Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems 231 For Windows XP 1 Click Start gt Control panel Click Performance and Maintenance Click Power Options Click the Hibernate tab Click the Enable hibernation check box Click OK If you want to be able to enter hibernation mode by pressing Fn F12 you need to install ThinkPad PM driver a A O N D Problem The battery discharges slightly while the computer is in hibernation mode Solution If the wakeup function is enabled the computer consumes small amount of power This is not a defect For details refer to Power saving modes on page 59 Drives and other storage devices This section includes three drive problems which are hard disk drive solid state drive and optical drive Hard disk drive problems Problem The hard disk drive makes a rattling noise intermittently Solution The rattling noise might be heard When the hard disk drive begins or finishes getting access to data When you carry the hard disk drive When you carry your computer This is a normal characteristic of a hard disk drive and is not a defect Problem The hard disk drive does not work Solution In the startup menu of the ThinkPad Setup make sure that the hard disk drive is included in the Boot priority order list If it is in
226. n folder by use of the Rescue and Recovery program e If you cannot find the Supplement files the device drivers and application software you need on your hard disk drive or if you want to receive updates and the latest information about them go to http www lenovo com support site wss document do sitestyle lenovo amp lndocid tpad matrix Before you begin Before you install the operating system do the following e Copy all the subdirectories and files in the C SWTOOLS directory to a removable storage device to avoid losing files during the installation e Print the sections you will be using Go to the section for the operating system you are using Windows 7 on page 174 Windows Vista on page 175 Windows XP on page 176 Notes If your computer is a Windows Vista SP2 or Windows 7 model 32 bit versions of Windows do not support UEFI BIOS features Only 64 bit versions of Windows can take advantage of the features enabled by 64 bit UEFI BIOS If you want to start Windows Recovery Environment WinRE using 64 bit version of Microsoft Windows Installation DVD you should not change the initial UEFI Legacy Boot setting in ThinkPad Setup The UEFI Legacy Boot setting must be the same as it was when the Windows OS image was installed Or you will see an error For the country or region code required in the installation use one of the following Copyright Lenovo 2011 173 Country or region Code
227. nagement feature 3 If a Disk Encryption hard disk drive and Encryption solid state drive on page 96 is installed in your computer be sure to protect the contents of your computer memory from unauthorized access by use of drive encryption software such as Microsoft Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption in Windows 7 and Windows Vista Refer to Using Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption on page 95 4 Before you dispose of sell or hand over your computer make sure to delete data stored on it Refer to Notice on deleting data from your hard disk drive or solid state drive on page 105 Notes The following drive s can be protected by UEFI BIOS e The hard disk drive built into your computer Using Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption To help protect your computer from being subject to unauthorized access be sure to use drive encryption software such as Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption is an integral security feature of Windows 7 and Windows Vista It is supported in Ultimate and Enterprise editions of Windows 7 and Windows Vista It can help you protect the operating system and data stored in your computer data even if your computer is lost or stolen BitLocker works by encrypting all user and system files including the swap and hibernation files BitLocker uses a Trusted Platform Module to provide enhanced protection for your data and to ensure early boot component integrity A compatible
228. nd all cables from the computer Wait for a few minutes till the inside of the computer cools before you start the following procedures 2 Close the computer display and turn the computer over 3 Remove the battery For details refer to the instructions in Remove the battery on page 116 134 User Guide 4 Remove the keyboard For details refer to the instructions in Remove the keyboard on page 118 5 Remove the palm rest For details refer to the instructions in Remove the palm rest on page 122 6 If a tool for removing connectors is included in the package with the new card use it to disconnect the cables from the card If no such tool is included disconnect the cables by picking up the connectors with your fingers and gently unplugging them Chapter 6 Replacing devices 135 8 Remove the card S Ae 9 Align the contact edge of the new PCI Express Mini Card with the corresponding socket contact of the computer 136 User Guide 10 Pivot the card until you can snap it into place by pressing the upper side of the connectors E and secure the card with the screw H A 11 Connect the cables to the new PCI Express Mini Card Be sure to attach the gray cable to the connector marked MAIN or M on the card and the black cable to the connector marked AUX or A A Note If the new PCI Express Mini Card has three connectors be sure to attach the gray cable to the con
229. ne Morrisville NC 27560 Phone Number 919 294 5900 Fe Industry Canada Class B emission compliance statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada 246 User Guide European Union Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004 108 EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non recommended modification of the product including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022 The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices C German Class B compliance statement Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis Hinweis f r Ger te der Klasse B EU Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertr glichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU Richtlinie 2004 108 EG fr her 89 336 EWG zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften Uber die elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit in den EU Mitgliedss
230. necessary repaired by an authorized servicer As with any electronic device pay close attention to the product when it is turned on On very rare occasions you might notice an odor or see a puff of smoke or sparks vent from your product Or you might hear sounds like popping cracking or hissing These conditions might merely mean that an internal electronic component has failed in a safe and controlled manner Or they might indicate a potential safety issue However do not take risks or attempt to diagnose the situation yourself Contact the Customer Support Center for further guidance For a list of Service and Support phone numbers see the following Web site http www lenovo com support phone Frequently inspect your computer and its components for damage or wear or signs of danger If you have any question about the condition of a component do not use the product Contact the Customer Support Center or the product manufacturer for instructions on how to inspect the product and have it repaired if necessary In the unlikely event that you notice any of the following conditions or if you have any safety concerns with your product stop using the product and unplug it from the power source and telecommunication lines until you can speak to the Customer Support Center for further guidance e Power cords plugs power adapters extension cords surge protectors or power supplies that are cracked broken or damaged e Signs of overhe
231. nector marked TR1 on the card and the black cable to the connector marked TR2 If you attach either cable to the center connector the connection speed will be lower 12 Reinstall the palm rest For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the palm rest on page 122 13 Reinstall the keyboard For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the keyboard on page 118 14 Reinstall the battery For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the battery on page 116 15 Turn the computer over again Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer then turn it on Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless WAN connection Before you start print these instructions Chapter 6 Replacing devices 137 Some ThinkPad models have a PCI Express Mini Card slot for connection to a wireless WAN To replace the PCI Express Mini Card with a new one read the following prerequisites Prerequisites for the procedure Mrooncer During electrical storms do not connect the cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet on the wall Mroancer Electric current from power telephone and communication cables is hazardous To avoid shock hazard disconnect the cables before opening the cover of this slot Attention Before you start installing a PCI Express Mini Card touch a metal table or a grounded metal object This action reduces any static electricity from your body
232. nectors with your fingers and gently unplugging them 132 User Guide 8 Remove the card 9 Align the contact edge of the new PCI Express Mini Card with the corresponding socket contact of the computer Chapter 6 Replacing devices 133 10 Pivot the card until you can snap it into place by pressing the upper side of the connectors Ij and secure the card with the screw I 11 Connect the cables to the new PCI Express Mini Card Be sure to attach the gray cable to the connector marked MAIN or M on the card and the black cable to the connector marked AUX or A A Note If the new PCI Express Mini Card has three connectors be sure to attach the gray cable to the connector marked TR1 on the card and the black cable to the connector marked TR2 If you attach either cable to the center connector the connection speed will be lower 12 Reinstall the palm rest For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the palm rest on page 122 13 Reinstall the keyboard For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the keyboard on page 118 14 Reinstall the battery For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the battery on page 116 15 Turn the computer over again Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer then turn it on Replacing a PCI Express Mini Card with three connectors 1 Turn off the computer then disconnect the ac power adapter a
233. nel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Mouse gt UltraNav tab You can also change the UltraNav settings by clicking the UltraNav icon on the system tray To display the UltraNav icon on the system tray see Adding the UltraNav icon to the system tray on page 57 Using the TrackPoint pointing device The TrackPoint pointing device consists of a pointing stick 1 on the keyboard and three click buttons at the bottom of the keyboard To move the pointer 5 on the screen you apply pressure to the nonslip cap on the pointing stick in any direction parallel to the keyboard the pointing stick itself does not move The speed at which the pointer moves depends on the pressure you apply to the pointing stick The functions of the left 4 and right 2 click buttons correspond to those of the left and right mouse buttons on a conventional mouse The TrackPoint center button 8 called the scroll bar enables you to scroll Web pages or documents in any direction with no need to use the graphic scroll bars on the side of the window 54 User Guide If you are not familiar with the TrackPoint these instructions will help you get started 1 Place your hands in the typing position and press gently with either index finger on the pointing stick in the direction in which you want the pointer to move To move the pointer press the pointing stick away from you to move it up toward you to move it down to one side or the other to move it side
234. ng conditions gently clean the surface of the reader with a dry soft lint free cloth e The surface of the reader is dirty or stained e The surface of the reader is wet e The reader often fails to enroll or authenticate your fingerprint Register your computer e Register your ThinkPad products with Lenovo refer to the Web page http Awww lenovo com register This can help authorities return your computer to you if it is lost or stolen Registering your computer also enables Lenovo to notify you about possible technical information and upgrades Be sure not to modify your computer e Only an authorized ThinkPad repair technician should disassemble and repair your computer e Do not modify or tape the latches to keep the display open or closed 204 User Guide Tips on using the built in modem e Your computer modem may use only an analog telephone network or public switched telephone network PSTN Do not connect the modem to a PBX private branch exchange or any other digital telephone extension line because this could damage your modem Analog phone lines are often used in homes while digital phone lines are often used in hotels or office buildings If you are not sure which kind of phone line you are using contact your telephone company e Your computer might have both an Ethernet connector and a modem connector If so be sure to connect your communication cable to the correct one bancer To avoid the risk of electrical sho
235. ng the Bluetooth enabled services on your computer that are provided for remote devices e Configuring the name and device type of your computer The Advanced Configuration has the following functions e Configuring the name and device type of your computer e Configuring your computer settings so that remote Bluetooth enabled devices can find your computer e Configuring your computer settings so that your computer can find remote Bluetooth enabled devices e Configuring on your computer the Bluetooth enabled services provided for remote devices e Configuring the services on remote Bluetooth enabled devices e Displaying information about Bluetooth hardware 66 User Guide For details refer to the help for Bluetooth To see the help double click My Bluetooth Places and click Help and then Bluetooth help Another way to start the help is to right click Bluetooth Configuration in the system tray of the task bar and click Advanced Configuration and then Help Installing the Microsoft Bluetooth software in Windows XP If you want to use the Microsoft Bluetooth software do as follows 1 First uninstall the ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software a Turn Bluetooth power off b Click Start gt Control Panel c Click Add or Remove Programs d Select ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software then click Change Remove to uninstall the software e Follow the instructions on the screen 2 Next install the Microsoft Blue
236. ng tips to improve performance and achieve greater comfort Active sitting and rest breaks The longer you sit and work with your computer the more important it is to observe your working posture Following general recommendations for maintaining a healthy working posture on page 83 and practicing active sitting are the best ways to avoid discomfort associated with your working postures Making minor voluntary postural changes and taking short frequent work breaks are the key ingredients for healthy computing Your computer is a light and mobile system remember that it can easily be repositioned on your working surface to accommodate many posture modifications you might wish to make Work area setup options Familiarize yourself with all of your office furniture so that you know how to adjust your work surface seat and other work tools to accommodate your preferences for comfort If your work area is not in an office setting be sure to take special note of employing active sitting and utilizing work breaks Note that there are many ThinkPad product solutions available to help you modify and expand your computer to best suit your needs Access the following Web site to view some of these options http www lenovo com accessories services index html Explore your options for docking solutions and external products that can provide the adjustability and features that you want ThinkPad features that promote comfort There are easy to use
237. ngth of the wireless connection is marginal 68 User Guide enni l Power to the wireless radio is on The signal strength of the wireless connection is excellent e Access Connections Gauge states wireless WAN No signal Signal level 1 oo Signal level 2 m Signal level 3 Note For more information about Access Connections Gauge see the Help in Access Connections Access Connections icon and wireless status icon The Access Connections icon displays general connection status The wireless status icon displays the signal strength and status of your wireless connection You can find more detailed information about the signal strength and status of your wireless connection either by opening Access Connections or by double clicking the Access Connections wireless status icon in the task bar Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model to display the Access Connections status icon and the wireless status icon in the system tray refer to the Access Connections on line help e Access Connections icon states amp No location profile is active or none exists a Current location profile is disconnected a Current location profile is connected e Wireless status icon states wireless LAN Power to the wireless radio is off Ef Power to the wireless radio is on No association Power to the wireless radio is on No signal Power to the wireless radio is on The signal strength of the wireless connection
238. nkPad Ultrabase Series 3 has two positions 154 User Guide Unlock position If the UltraBase lock is in this position your computer is not secured H Base lock position If the UltraBase lock is in this position the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 is locked and the computer cannot be removed from the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 The Serial Ultrabay Slim device is also locked and cannot be removed from the UltraBase Note Keep the security key in a safe place Do not lose this key otherwise you will be unable to detach the computer from the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 If you attach a mechanical lock to the security keyhole of the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 cannot be taken out of the locked position and you can secure your computer and the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 Note You need to purchase the mechanical lock commercially You are responsible for evaluating selecting and implementing the locking devices and security features ThinkPad Battery 19 Your ThinkPad X220 X220i X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet support the ThinkPad Battery 19 With ThinkPad Battery 19 you can extend the operating time of your notebook computer When the computer is attached to the ThinkPad Battery 19 never pick up the assembly by taking hold of the computer alone Always hold the whole assembly Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer 155 Top view E The docking connector is used for attaching the ThinkPa
239. nnot detect the external monitor the New Display Detected dialog box does not open For details refer to the Windows online help For Windows XP 1 Turn off the computer 2 Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet 3 Turn on the external monitor and the computer 4 Change the display output location by pressing Fn F7 This allows you to switch between viewing output on the external display the computer display and both displays Notes e Do not change the display output location while a moving picture is being drawn for example while playing a movie or a game or viewing a business presentation Close the application before changing the display output location or change the display mode before you open an MPEG file to play e If you are attaching an external monitor that supports only VGA mode 640x480 resolution do not view output on both the computer display and the external monitor Doing so would cause the external monitor screen to be scrambled and the output not to be displayed in addition it could cause damage to the screen Use the external monitor only e lf the external TFT monitor you connect has an analog interface flickers or ripples may appear on some displays such as the shutdown screen of Windows This is caused by the external TFT monitor and cannot be fixed by adjusting the external TFT monitor or the computer side settings Setting the monitor typ
240. novo com support Installing the Windows 7 Update Module Package The Windows 7 Update Modules are in the following directory C SWTOOLS OSFIXES The name of each subfolder is the number of a fix module For information about each fix module go to the Microsoft Knowledge Base homepage at http support microsoft com type the number of the fix module you need in the search field and click Search 174 User Guide Note The Web site address might change without notice If the homepage is not displayed search for it from the Microsoft top page To install a fix module run the EXE file in a subfolder and follow the instructions on the screen Note If you remove the hard disk drive from the computer with a single core processor and install it on a computer with a dual core processor you can get access to the hard disk drive The opposite however is not true If you remove the hard disk drive from a computer with a dual core processor and install it on a computer with a single core processor you cannot get access to the hard disk drive Installing Windows Vista Before you start print these instructions Note Your computer supports Windows Vista with the Service Pack 2 Before you install Windows Vista Service Pack 2 make sure you install the Windows Vista Service Pack 1 first To install Windows Vista and its related software on your computer do as follows 1 Start the ThinkPad Setup 2 Select Startup menu 3 Select UEF
241. novo technologies advancing to provide you with the best engineered systems some models are equipped with a solid state drive SSD for data storage This cutting edge technology enables notebook computers to be lighter smaller and faster Note The hidden service partition is the reason why there is less free space than expected on your hard disk drive or SSD This reduction is more noticeable on the SSD because of its smaller capacity 10 User Guide E Combo audio jack To listen to the sound from your computer connect a headphone or a headset that has a 3 5mm 4 pole plug to the combo audio jack Notes e If you are using a headset with a function switch for example a headset for an iPhone mobile digital device do not press this switch while using the headset If you press it the headset microphone will be disabled and the internal microphone will be enabled instead e The combo audio jack does not support a conventional microphone For more information about the audio devices supported by the combo audio jack of your computer see Using audio features on page 77 H Ethernet connector Connect your computer to a LAN with the Ethernet connector bancer To avoid the risk of electrical shock do not connect the telephone cable to the Ethernet connector You can only connect an Ethernet cable to this connector Two indicators to the upper right and left of the connector show the status of the network connection When y
242. nue the installation press Enter again Leave the diskette in the drive until the next reboot the software may need to be copied from the diskette again when the files are copied during setup 17 Complete the installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2 by following OS installing instructions 18 Install Windows XP Service Pack 3 You can install the Windows XP Service Pack 3 using the Windows XP Service Pack 3 Installation CD or download it from either Microsoft Download Center or Microsoft Windows update Web site 19 Install the Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 To do this refer to Installing Intel Chipset Support for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 on page 180 20 Apply the PCMCIA Power Policy Registry Patch To do this go to C SWTOOLS OSFIXES PCMCIAPW double click install bat Then follow the instructions that appear on the screen 21 Install device drivers To do this refer to Installing drivers and software on page 181 If you do not have a diskette drive you can install Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver by the following alternative procedure Note If you select AHCI for Serial ATA SATA in the ThinkPad Setup before installing Intel Rapid Storage Technology Driver your computer will not respond it will only display a blue screen Start the ThinkPad Setup Select Config Select Serial ATA SATA Select Compatibility Change the startup sequence of your computer Select Startup menu
243. number label There is no FCC ID or IC Certification number for the PCI Express Mini Card shown on the enclosure of your computer The FCC ID and IC Certification number label is affixed on the card installed in the PCI Express Mini Card slot of your computer TX FCC ID and IC Certification number for installed transmitter cards are located under the customer removable access panel Keyboard or Palmrest see User Manual WWAN PCI i i WLAN Full Half PCI Express Mini Card Express Mini Card If no integrated wireless PCI Express Mini Card has been preinstalled in your computer you can install one To do this follow the procedure in Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN WiMAX connection on page 131 or Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless WAN connection on page 137 Certificate of Authenticity label The Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label for the preinstalled operating system is attached Printed on this label are the product ID and the product key information for your computer Record this information and keep it in a safe place You might need these numbers to start your computer or reinstall the operating system The Windows Certificate of Authenticity of your computer is shown as below 26 User Guide ThinkPad X220 and X220i f ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet This section provides features for your notebook computer Th
244. o Otherwise follow the instructions on the screen Installing the driver for USB 3 0 If your computer supports USB 3 0 and you have reinstalled the operating system you need to download and install the USB 3 0 driver to use the USB 3 0 Do the following For Windows 7 and Windows Vista 1 Access Lenovo Web site at http www lenovo com support site wss document do sitestyle lenovo amp lndocid HOME LENOVO When you get to the site find your model and display the driver links 2 Select the USB 3 0 driver for 32 bit or 64 bit and extract it to your local hard disk 3 Double click Setup exe in C DRIVERS WIN USB3 0 4 Click Next If the device driver is already installed click Cancel Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is finished For Windows XP 1 Access Lenovo Web site at http www lenovo com support site wss document do sitestyle lenovo amp lndocid HOME LENOVO When you get to the site find your model and display the driver links 2 Select the USB 3 0 driver for 32 bit and extract it to your local hard disk 3 Double click Setup exe in C DRIVERS WIN USB3 0 178 User Guide 4 Click Next If the device driver is already installed click Cancel Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is finished Installing ThinkPad Monitor File for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 ThinkPad Monitor File for Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 is in the following directory C SWTOOLS DRIVERS MONITOR
245. o turn on Bluetooth Click Start gt Control Panel Click Printers and Other Hardware Click Bluetooth Devices Click the Options tab Click Learn more about Bluetooth Settings on hr Ww DY Note If you are using the ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software refer to the following instructions Note Check your connection anytime and make sure that no other Bluetooth enabled device is searching for the device to which you want to connect Simultaneous searching is not allowed in the Bluetooth connection e Problem You search for a Bluetooth enabled device by clicking View devices in range in My Bluetooth Places but you cannot find anything Solution Make sure that the device to which you want to connect is enabled for the Bluetooth connection After making sure of the above turn the Bluetooth power off and then on again or restart your computer Then search for the device again Note If you are using the ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software refer to the following instructions e Problem You cannot connect to any Bluetooth enabled device Solution Make sure that both your computer and the device are turned on and their Bluetooth antennas are enabled After making sure of the above turn the Bluetooth power off and then on again or restart your computer Then re establish your connection to the device If the problem persists re install the Bluetooth software and reestablish your connect
246. o your computer E Monitor connector You can attach an external monitor or a projector to your computer to display computer information Note If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 and use a monitor connector use the monitor connector on the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 or ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 not the one on the computer For details refer to the instructions in Attaching an external monitor on page 71 i USB connector The Universal Serial Bus connectors are used for connecting devices compatible with a USB interface such as a printer or a digital camera Notes e Your computer may look slightly different from the illustrations e Your computer is compatible with USB 1 1 and 2 0 Some models are also compatible with USB 3 0 e If your computer is a USB 3 0 model any function specific to USB 3 0 will not work until your Windows operating system has been started However USB 2 0 or 1 0 devices will work Fan louvers left The internal fan and louvers enable air to circulate in the computer and cool the central processor Note To avoid impeding airflow do not place any obstacle in front of the fan Chapter 1 Product Overview 13 ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet left side view Figure 6 Left side view Express
247. oancen During electrical storms do not connect the cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet on the wall bancer Electric current from power telephone and communication cables is hazardous To avoid shock hazard disconnect the cables before opening the cover of this slot To replace the keyboard do as follows Removing the keyboard 1 Turn off the computer then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer Wait for a few minutes till the inside of the computer cools before you start the following procedures 2 Close the computer display and turn the computer over 3 Remove the battery For details refer to the instructions in Remove the battery on page 116 118 User Guide 4 Loosen the two screws on the memory slot cover then remove the cover 5 Turn the computer over and open the display 6 Push hard in the direction shown by the arrows Jin the drawing to unlatch the front side of the keyboard The keyboard will open up slightly i Chapter 6 Replacing devices 119 7 Carefully lift the keyboard until you can see how it s connected Hold the keyboard above the computer and then detach the connector Now the keyboard has been removed Installing the keyboard 1 Attach the connector 120 User Guide 2 Insert the keyboard Make sure that the rear edges of the keyboard are under the frame as shown by the arrows 3 Press gently on the areas marked
248. ocated at the top left and the top right portions of your computer display For the specific locations of each antenna refer to Location of the UltraConnect wireless antennas on page 244 2 User Guide H Integrated camera Some models have the integrated camera By using this camera you can take pictures or hold a video conference For more information about how to use the camera refer to Using an integrated camera on page 78 E ThinkLight You can use your computer under less than perfect lighting conditions To illuminate the keyboard turn on the ThinkLight by pressing Fn PgUp To turn it off press Fn PgUp again Ei Computer display The high resolution thin film transistor TFT display provides clear and brilliant text and graphics For details refer to the instructions in Changing display settings on page 70 i System and power status indicators Your computer has the system status indicators and the power status indicators For the detailed information about the location and meaning of each indicator see ThinkPad X220 and X220i status indicators on page 18 Power switch Use the power switch to turn on the computer To turn off your computer use the Start menu shutdown options If you cannot turn off the computer by this method press and hold the power switch for 2 seconds If your computer stops responding and you cannot turn it off press and hold the power switch for 4 seconds or more
249. ograms gt Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools gt Enhanced Backup and Restore The Rescue and Recovery program opens 2 Inthe Rescue and Recovery main window click the Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery arrow 3 Click Back up your hard drive and select backup operation options Then follow the instructions on the screen to complete the backup operation e To perform a backup operation using the Rescue and Recovery program on the Windows Vista operating system or the Windows XP operating system do the following 1 From the Windows desktop click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Rescue and Recovery The Rescue and Recovery program opens 2 Inthe Rescue and Recovery main window click Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery gt Back up your hard drive and select backup operation options 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the backup operation Performing a recovery operation This section provides instructions on how to perform a recovery operation using the Rescue and Recovery program on different operating systems e To perform a recovery operation using the Rescue and Recovery program on the Windows 7 operating system do the following Chapter 5 Recovery overview 109 1 From the Windows desktop click Start gt All Programs gt Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools gt Enhanced Backup and Restore The Rescue and Recovery program opens 2 In the Rescue and Recovery main window click the Launch advanced Rescue
250. oint only disable touch pad 3 Click Close e Configure settings in UltraNav properties window For Windows 7 and Windows Vista 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Mouse 2 Click UltraNav tab 3 To disable the TrackPoint clear the check box for Enable TrackPoint To disable the touch pad clear the check box for Enable touch pad 4 Click OK For Windows XP 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Mouse 2 Click UltraNav tab 3 To disable the TrackPoint clear the check box for Enable TrackPoint To disable the touch pad clear the check box for Enable touch pad 4 Click OK Note You can also open the UltraNav properties window by clicking the UltraNav icon in the task bar For details refer to the instructions in Adding the UltraNav icon to the system tray on page 57 Adding the UltraNav icon to the system tray For easy access to the UltraNav properties you can add the UltraNav icon on the system tray To enable the display of the UltraNav icon on the system tray do as follows 1 Press Fn F8 A panel headed UltraNav Device Settings pops up Click Manage Settings to open the Mouse properties window Click the UltraNav tab Select the check box for Show UltraNav icon on the system tray Click OK or Apply If your computer is a Windows 7 model click Show hidden icons in the task bar The UltraNav icon is displayed To add it to the task bar permanentl
251. omputer is turned off or is in sleep standby mode or hibernation mode e Quick blinking orange An error occurred in the battery e The battery status indicator blinks three times The ac power adapter is attached to the computer 20 User Guide e The battery status indicator is off The battery is fully charged or the battery is detached ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet status indicators Your computer has system status indicators and power status indicators The status indicators show the current status of your computer Status indicators EJ Power On The power switch stays lit whenever the computer is on blinks when the computer is in sleep standby mode and is off when the computer is off H Speaker mute button and EJ Microphone mute button If you mute the sound and then turn off your computer the sound will remain muted when you turn on your computer again To turn on the sound press the plus or minus button EJ Caps Lock Caps Lock mode is enabled You can enter all alphabetic characters A Z in upper case without pressing the Shift key H Wireless LAN Wireless WAN WiMAX status e Green The wireless LAN feature the 802 11b g Standard 802 11a b g or 802 11n draft 2 0 wireless WAN feature or WiMAX feature is on and the radio link is ready for use or the data is being transmitted e Off Wireless network devices are disabled or the radio is turned off D Bluetooth status e Green The f
252. on 8 Click OK to accept the driver signature 9 Click Finish 10 Restart the computer if necessary If you did not turn the Bluetooth power on before installing ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software that is if you skipped step 1 replace the Bluetooth driver as follows 1 Click Start gt Control Panel Chapter 2 Using your computer 67 Click Performance and Maintenance then click System Click the Hardware tab then click Device Manager Double click Bluetooth Radios to extract the Bluetooth Radios device tree Double click the ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate icon to open the Properties window Click the Driver tab then click Update Driver Click No not this time and then click Next Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and then click Next Select Don t search will choose the driver to install then click Next Select the driver that has no Digital Signed icon then click Next Click Finish O O AON Oa KW PD Note If you use the wireless feature the 802 11 standard of your computer simultaneously with a Bluetooth option data transmission speed can be delayed and the performance of the wireless feature can be degraded Using WiMAX Some ThinkPad notebooks come with a built in wireless LAN card integrating WiMAX technology WiMAX a long range wireless data transmission technology based on the 802 16 standard provides you with
253. on Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model it does not support Presentation Director but the Fn F7 or Win P key combination is available for switching display output to a connected projector Presentation Director provides an easy way to set up your computer to help you give presentations with confidence even when you are away from your office Use Presentation Director to adjust resolution settings and temporarily disable power management timers to ensure an uninterrupted presentation Presentation Director has some predefined presentation schemes To apply a presentation scheme you can use the Fn F7 key combination To start Presentation Director click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Presentation Director and follow the instructions on the screen Projecting video To display information and make presentations you can attach a data projector to your computer Attach the data projector to the monitor connector on your computer Note It may take several seconds before the projector displays the image If you do not see your desktop displayed after 60 seconds try pressing Fn F7 to switch between different display output locations You can create a presentation scheme by following the instructions of the Presentation Director with the projector attached to your computer You can save the scheme for a future presentation with the same equipment Chapter 2 Using your computer 75 Playing sound Your projector m
254. on can replace passwords and enable simple and secure user access For more advanced security Client Security Solution can be installed The software is compatible with a variety of user authentication mechanisms such as those involving fingerprint authentication This fingerprint reader can work with the software Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model Client Security Solution is not preinstalled on it Enrolling your fingerprint 1 Turn on your computer 2 To start Lenovo Fingerprint software refer to Fingerprint Software on page 35 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to enroll your fingerprint For details refer to the Help for the program Chapter 4 Security 97 LED behavior of the fingerprint reader Table 4 LED behavior list_fingerprint reader Indicator Description S LED blinks green The fingerprint is being authenticated or has been authenticated LED is solid green The fingerprint reader is ready to swipe LED blinks amber The fingerprint could not be authenticated Swiping your finger over the reader To swipe your finger over the reader do as follows 1 Place the ball of your finger that is the central part of the fingerprint on the small circle above the reader Make sure that the entire top joint of the finger is on the reader 98 User Guide 2 Apply light pressure and swipe your finger across the reader in one smooth motion Logging on to the system After you enroll
255. ooth For Windows 7 and Windows Vista If your computer is equipped with the Integrated Bluetooth features you can enable or disable the features by pressing Fn F5 If you press Fn F5 a list of wireless features is displayed You can enable or disable the Bluetooth features with a single click To configure a Bluetooth device or manage connection settings you can use Bluetooth Devices in Control Panel 1 Click Start gt Control Panel 2 Click Hardware and Sound 3 Click Devices and Printers in Windows Vista Bluetooth Devices To send data to a Bluetooth enabled device do as follows 1 Right click data that you want to send 2 Select Send To gt Bluetooth Devices For details refer to the Windows online help 64 User Guide Note If you use the wireless feature the 802 11 standard of your computer simultaneously with a Bluetooth option data transmission speed can be delayed and the performance of the wireless feature can be degraded For Windows XP If your computer is equipped with the Integrated Bluetooth features you can enable or disable the features by pressing Fn F5 If you press Fn F5 a list of wireless features is displayed You can enable or disable the Bluetooth features with a single click In Windows XP you can use either ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software or the Microsoft Bluetooth software By default ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software is installed on your comput
256. open the Lenovo SimpleTap do the following e For Windows 7 See Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 e For Windows Vista Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Lenovo SimpleTap Lenovo ThinkVantage Tablet Shortcut Menu If your notebook is a tablet model Lenovo ThinkVantage Tablet Shortcut Menu is available in your system The Tablet Shortcut Menu is a utility for your ThinkPad utility programs such as Access Connections Presentation Director and EasyEject Utility for launching custom defined applications for changing system settings and for changing the focus from one window to another window You can use this utility to enable a function that makes your computer detect the state of the display notebook mode or tablet mode and change the screen orientation automatically to suit your preference To open the Lenovo ThinkVantage Tablet Shortcut Menu do the following e For Windows 7 See Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 e For Windows Vista Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt ThinkPad Tablet Shortcut Menu 38 User Guide Chapter 2 Using your computer Your computer is powerful and is loaded with features and applications Use it to accomplish anything any day any time This chapter contains the following topics e Register your computer on page 39 e Frequently asked questions on page 39 e Special keys and buttons on page 46 e Usin
257. or Windows Vista Note If you select Show different parts of my desktop on each display extended refer to Using the Extend desktop function on page 76 1 Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet Turn on the external monitor Press Fn F7 to change the display output location to the external monitor Right click on the desktop and click Personalize Click Display Settings The Display Settings window opens Click Advanced Settings Click the Monitor tab Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type is correct If it is click OK to close the window otherwise do as follows NO oO fF W PY 8 If more than two monitor types are displayed select Generic PnP Monitor or Generic Non PnP Monitor 9 Click Properties If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation 10 Click the Driver tab 11 Click Update Driver 12 Click Browse my computer for driver software and then click Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer 13 Clear the Show compatible hardware check box 14 Select Manufacturer and Model for your monitor If you cannot find your monitor in the list stop the installation of this driver and use the driver shipped with your monitor 15 After updating the driver click Close Chapter 2 Using your computer 73 16 17 Set
258. or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 is locked and you cannot remove your computer The key lock indicator lights when the eject button is locked 172 User Guide Chapter 8 Advanced configuration While it is important to protect files data and settings that are on the hard disk or on the solid state drive you may also need to install a new operating system install new device drivers update your UEFI BIOS or recover preinstalled software This information will help you handle your computer with proper care and keep it in top working shape e Installing a new operating system on page 173 e Installing device drivers on page 178 e ThinkPad Setup on page 181 e Using system management on page 197 Installing a new operating system If you install a new operating system in your computer you need to install the Supplement files and ThinkPad device drivers for it at the same time The necessary files are located in the following directories of your solid state drive or hard disk drive e The Supplement files for the operating system supported are in the C SWTOOLS OSFIXES directory e The device drivers for the operating system supported are in the C SWTOOLS DRIVERS directory e The preloaded software applications are in the C SWTOOLS APPS directory Notes e The process of installing the new operating system deletes all the data on your hard disk including backups or images that were stored in a hidde
259. ors Your computer has the system status indicators and the power status indicators For the detailed information about the location and meaning of each indicator see ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet status indicators on page 21 Tablet Buttons The Tablet Buttons allow you to control your computer in tablet mode even without the use of the keyboard and UltraNav Built in stereo speakers The stereo speakers are built into your computer For details refer to the instructions in Volume and mute buttons on page 52 Chapter 1 Product Overview 7 Right side view This section provides right side view for your computer ThinkPad X220 and X220i right side view naa Figure 3 Right side view Security keyhole H Hard disk drive or solid state drive EJ Combo audio jack EJ Ethernet connector H Always On USB connector H Media card reader slot Security keyhole Your computer comes with a security keyhole You can purchase a security cable and lock to fit this keyhole Ea Hard disk drive or solid state drive Your computer may have a large capacity customer upgradable hard disk drive that can meet a variety of storage demands To keep the drive safe Active Protection System is installed on your computer For details refer to Access Connections on page 34 If you wish you can purchase another hard disk drive and install it in the Serial Ultrabay Slim in the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 Wit
260. osoft Works applications you must use the Microsoft Office CD or Microsoft Works CD These discs are provided only with computers preinstalled with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works Creating and using a rescue medium With a rescue medium such as a disc or a USB hard disk drive you can recover the computer from failures that prevent you from gaining access to the Rescue and Recovery workspace on your hard disk drive Notes 1 The recovery operations you can perform using a rescue medium vary depending on the operating system 2 The rescue disc can be started in all types of optical drives Creating a rescue medium This section provides instructions on how to create a rescue medium on different operating systems e To create a rescue medium on the Windows 7 operating system do the following 1 From the Windows desktop click Start gt All Programs gt Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools gt Enhanced Backup and Restore The Rescue and Recovery program opens 2 Inthe Rescue and Recovery main window click the Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery arrow 3 Click the Create Rescue Media icon The Create Rescue and Recovery Media window opens 4 Inthe Rescue Media area select the type of the rescue medium you want to create You can create a rescue medium using a disc a USB hard disk drive or a secondary internal hard disk drive 5 Click OK and follow the instructions on the screen to create a rescue medium e To create a rescue me
261. ote Wake On LAN function does not work when a hard disk password is set USB Ethernet LAN Option ROM Disabled Load the Ethernet LAN 186 User Guide Enabled Option ROM to enable startup from an integrated network device USB UEFI BIOS Support Disabled Enable or disable boot E support for USB diskette nepled USB memory key and USB optical drive Disabled Enabled If you select Enabled the external USB devices can be charged via USB ports even when the system is in low power mode standby hibernate or power off Always On USB Table 6 Config menu items continued Menu item Submenu item Selection Comments Always On USB Charge in Disabled If you select Enabled the off mode e Enabled Always On USB connector enables you to charge some devices such as iPod and iPhone and BlackBerry smartphones Note If you want to charge these devices when your computer is in hibernation mode or powered off you will need to open the Power Manager program and configure corresponding settings to enable the Always On USB connector function For details about how to enable the Always On USB connector function refer to the online help of the Power Manager program Keyboard Mouse TrackPoint Disabled Enable or disable the Enabled built in TrackPoint Note If you want to use an external mouse select Disabled Touch Pad Disabled Enable or disable the Enabled built
262. other side of the cloth or with a clean cloth 4 After using the cloth wash it with a neutral detergent Using the Tablet buttons On the display bezel near the screen is a row of buttons with which you can control your computer in the tablet mode without the use of the keyboard Chapter 2 Using your computer 45 Press the Screen Rotation buttonto rotate the screen clockwise Ea The Secure Attention Sequence button functions the same as the Ctrl Alt Del key combination EJ Press the power button button to turn the computer on or off Using the Tablet Shortcut Menu Tablet Shortcut Menu is a software tool bar that is optimized for use when your computer is in the tablet mode From this menu you can adjust certain system settings and start the ThinkPad utility programs such as Access Connections and Presentation Director The menu also provides functions that are useful in the tablet mode such as changing the screen orientation automatically for different positions of the computer disabling the Beam Forming feature automatically in tablet mode or resuming the system from standby when the Tablet Digitizer Pen is removed from its slot To start the Tablet Shortcut Menu press the Using the Tablet buttons on page 45 on the computer display bezel using either the Tablet Digitizer Pen or your finger The main panel appears on the screen There is another way to open the main panel For Windows 7 Click Start gt All Programs gt L
263. ou prefer as follows e Set both the TrackPoint and the touch pad as pointing devices This setting enables the use of all the basic and extended functions of the TrackPoint and the touch pad e Set the TrackPoint as the main pointing device and the touch pad for extended functions only This setting enables the use of all basic and extended functions with the TrackPoint while limiting the use of the touch pad to scrolling tap zones and slow motion pointer functions e Set the touch pad as the main pointing device and the TrackPoint for the extended functions only This setting enables the use of all basic and extended functions with the touch pad while limiting the use of the TrackPoint to scrolling and Magnifying Glass functions e Set the TrackPoint as the main pointing device and disable the touch pad e Set the touch pad as the main pointing device and disable the TrackPoint Changing the UltraNav settings You can change your settings of UltraNav in the UltraNav tab of the Mouse Properties window To open it use one of the following methods e Press Fn F8 and the UltraNav Device Settings window is displayed In this window click Manage Settings A mouse properties window is displayed Click the UltraNav tab e Use the Start menu of your computer as follows For Windows 7 and Windows Vista Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Mouse gt UltraNav tab For Windows XP Click Start gt Control Pa
264. our computer connects to a LAN and a session with the network is available the upper right indicator is solid green While data is being transmitted the upper left indicator blinks yellow For details refer to the instructions in Access Connections on page 34 Note If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 and use an Ethernet connector use the Ethernet connector on the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 not the one on the computer Always On USB connector The Universal Serial Bus connectors are used for connecting devices compatible with a USB interface such as a printer or a digital camera By default even if your computer is in sleep standby mode the Always On USB connector still enables you to charge some devices such as iPod iPhone and BlackBerry smartphones by attaching the devices to the connector However with the ac power adapter attached if you want to charge these devices when your computer is in hibernation mode or powered off you will need to open the Power Manager program and configure corresponding settings to enable the Always On USB connector function For details about how to enable the Always On USB connector function refer to the on line help of the Power Manager program Note Your computer is compatible with USB 1 1 and 2 0 Media card reader slot Depending on the model your computer may have a media card reader slot The media card reader supports the following cards e SD c
265. ouse a keyboard a printer or any other electronic device so that they cannot be walked on tripped over pinched by your computer or other objects or in any way subjected to treatment that could interfere with the operation of your computer Copyright Lenovo 2011 v Protect your computer and data when moving it Before moving a computer equipped with a hard disk drive do one of the following and make sure that the power switch is off or is blinking e Turn it off e Press Fn F4 to put it in sleep standby mode e Press Fn F12 to put it in hibernation mode This will help to prevent damage to the computer and possible loss of data e Do not drop bump scratch twist hit vibrate push or place heavy objects on your computer display or external devices Use a quality carrying case that provides adequate cushioning and protection Do not pack your computer in a tightly packed suitcase or bag Before putting your computer in a carrying case make sure that it is off in sleep standby mode Fn F4 or in hibernation mode Fn F12 Do not put a computer in a carrying case while it is turned on Important safety information This information can help you safely use your notebook personal computer Follow and retain all information included with your computer The information in this document does not alter the terms of your purchase agreement or the Lenovo Limited Warranty For more information see Warranty
266. ove your computer EJ The docking indicator lights when your computer is docked E The eject button releases the computer from the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 when pressed H The sliding adjuster is a guide used to align the docking connector on your computer as you attach the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 i The docking connector is where you attach your computer fd The system lock key is for locking the eject button EJ The microphone jack a jack 1 8 inch 8 5 mm in diameter is for connecting an external microphone EJ The headphone jack a jack 1 8 inch 3 5 mm in diameter is for connecting an external stereo headphone 162 User Guide Rear view ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 Ea The power jack is for connecting the ac power adapter Ea The Ethernet connector is for connecting the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 to an Ethernet LAN The indicator on the connector is the same as that on the computer Notes e You cannot use the Token Ring cable for this connector e You can use this connector for a 1OBASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Ethernet If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 and use an Ethernet connector use the Ethernet connector on the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 not the one on the computer EJ The Universal Serial Bus connectors are for connecting USB 1 1 and USB 2 0 devices EJ The external monitor connector is for connecting an external monitor Note If you a
267. ower cord around a power adapter or other object Doing so can stress the cord in ways that can cause the cord to fray crack or crimp This can present a safety hazard Always route power cords so that they will not be walked on tripped over or pinched by objects Protect power cord and power adapters from liquids For instance do not leave your power cord or power adapter near sinks tubs toilets or on floors that are cleaned with liquid cleansers Liquids can cause a short circuit particularly if the power cord or power adapter has been stressed by misuse Liquids also can cause gradual corrosion of power cord terminals and or the connector terminals on a power adapter which can eventually result in overheating Always connect power cords and signal cables in the correct order and ensure that all power cord connectors are securely and completely plugged into receptacles Do not use any power adapter that shows corrosion at the AC input pins or shows signs of overheating such as deformed plastic at the AC input or anywhere on the power adapter Do not use any power cords where the electrical contacts on either end show signs of corrosion or overheating or where the power cord appears to have been damaged in any way Extension cords and related devices Ensure that extension cords surge protectors uninterruptible power supplies and power strips that you use are rated to handle the electrical requirements of the product Never over
268. pability e UEFI Only e Both System will boot by e Legacy Only following UEFI Legacy Boot Priority setting UEFI Only System will boot from UEFI enabled OS Legacy Only System will boot from any OS other than UEFI enabled OS Note If you select UEFI Only system cannot boot from the bootable devices which do not have UEFI enabled OS UEFI Legacy Boot Priority e UEFI First Select priority of boot option between e Legacy First UEFI and Legacy 196 User Guide Table 8 Startup menu items continued Boot Mode e Quick Screen during POST e Diagnostics e Quick ThinkPad Logo screen is displayed e Diagnostics Text messages are displayed Note You can also enter the Diagnostic mode by pressing Esc during POST Option Keys display ThinkVantage Disabled If you select Disabled the To button message Enabled interrupt normal startup press the blue ThinkVantage button message is not displayed during POST Boot Device List F12 Option Disabled If you select Enabled the F12 key Enabled is recognized and the Boot Menu is displayed Boot Order Lock Disabled If you select Enabled the Boot Enabled Priority Order is locked for your future use Updating your system UEFI BIOS The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface UEFI BIOS is a part of the system programs that make up the basic layer of software built into your computer UEFI BIOS translates the instructions from other sof
269. parameters To start ThinkPad Setup do as follows 1 To protect yourself against accidental loss of data back up your computer registry See Performing backup and recovery operations on page 109 2 If the diskette drive is connected to the computer remove any diskette from the diskette drive and then turn off the computer 3 Turn on the computer When the logo screen is displayed press the F1 key The ThinkPad Setup opens If you have set a supervisor password the ThinkPad Setup menu appears after you enter the password You can start the ThinkPad Setup by pressing Enter instead of entering the supervisor password however you cannot change the parameters that are protected by the supervisor password For more information refer to Using Passwords on page 89 An example of the ThinkPad Setup menu is shown as below ThinkPad Setu Main Contig Date Time Security Startup Restart UEFI BIOS Version 83ET18WW 0 18 UEFI BIOS Date Year Month Day 2010 10 15 Embedded Controller Version 83HTOSWW 0 08 Machine Type Model 814C01G System unit serial number 814C01GR9404EZP System board serial number 1DEG96410E Asset Tag No Asset Information CPU Type Genuine Intel R CPU T9800 CPU Speed 2 00GHz Installed memory 1024MB UUID 2cdc7dc0 dfbc 1 1d4 86fe 987939c 1ac1e MAC Address Internal LAN 00 1F 16 04 1A 74 F1 Help t4 Select Item J Change Values F9 Setup Defaults ESC Exit gt Select Menu Ent
270. pdating can be done after normal working hours and on weekends to save time and increase productivity Users are not interrupted during normal working hours and LAN traffic is kept to a minimum If a computer is turned on by the Wake on LAN function the Network boot sequence is used Resume on incoming call If your computer is connected to a telephone line and you have specified Resume on incoming call it will return from sleep standby mode to normal operation when a telephone call comes in To enable your computer to wake up from sleep standby mode do the following For Windows 7 and Windows Vista 1 Click Start and then click Control Panel 2 Click Hardware and Sound 3 Click Device Manager If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation The Device Manager window opens 4 Double click Modems in Windows Vista click the mark for Modems and then click your modem 5 Click the Power Management tab 198 User Guide 6 Select the Allow this device to wake the computer check box For Windows XP 1 Click Start and then click Control Panel 2 Click Performance and Maintenance 3 Click System 4 Click the Hardware tab 5 Click the Device Manager button The Device Manager window opens 6 Click the mark for Modems and then click your modem 7 Click Action and then click Properties 8 Click the Power Management tab 9 Select the Allow this device
271. pe and model label FCC ID and IC Certification number label Certificate of Authenticity label Features ThinkPad X220 ad X220 faturas ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet features Specifications ThinkPad X220 and X220i Shaetficutions ThinkPad X220 Tabet and X220i Tablet specifications Operating environment ThinkVantage technologies and SONE Accessing applications in Windows 7 Access Connections Active Protection System Client Security Solution Fingerprint Software Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox Message Center Plus Password Manager Power Manager Product Recovery Presentation Director Rescue and Recovery System Update ThinkVantage GPS Lenovo SimpleTap Lenovo ThinkVantage Tablet Shortcut Marit Chapter 2 Using your computer Copyright Lenovo 2011 vi vii vii 12 15 17 18 23 23 24 26 27 27 29 30 30 31 32 32 33 34 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 36 37 37 37 37 37 38 38 39 Register your computer Frequently asked questions Tablet mode Using the tablet mode Using the Tablet Digitizer Pen Using the touch panel Using the Tablet buttons Using the Tablet Shortcut Menu Special keys and buttons ThinkVantage button Numeric keypad Function key combinations Volume and mute buttons Windows key and Application key Using the UltraNav pointing device Using the TrackPoint pointing device Using the touch pad
272. place by pressing the upper side of each connector Secure the card with the screw Note Depending on the system configuration of your computer the card may have only one connector 140 User Guide 11 Connect the cables to the new PCI Express Mini Card 12 Reinstall the palm rest For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the palm rest on page 122 13 Reinstall the keyboard For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the keyboard on page 118 14 Reinstall the battery For details refer to the instructions in Reinstall the battery on page 116 15 Turn the computer over again Connect the ac power adapter and cables to the computer then turn it on Installing and replacing the mSATA solid state drive Before you start print these instructions Some ThinkPad models have an mSATA solid state drive You can replace the mSATA solid state drive with a new one which can be purchased from your Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative To replace the mSATA solid state drive read the following prerequisites Notes e You can also replace the mSATA solid state drive with a Wireless PCI Express Mini Card for Wireless WAN e Replace the mSATA solid state drive only if you need to have it repaired Prerequisites for the procedure When replacing the mSATA solid state drive be sure to follow the precautions Attention When you are handling an mSATA solid state drive e Do not drop the mS
273. played press F1 The ThinkPad Setup opens Using the cursor keys move to Security and press Enter The Security menu opens Using the cursor keys move to Fingerprint and press Enter The Fingerprint submenu opens Using the cursor keys move to an item you want to set When that item is highlighted press Enter Set the items you want to set Press F10 to exit O O ON OO KR WwW DY ys In the Setup Confirmation window select Yes Care for the fingerprint reader The following actions could damage the fingerprint reader or cause it not to work properly e Scratching the surface of the reader with a hard pointed object e Scraping the surface of the reader with your fingernail or anything hard e Using or touching the reader with a dirty finger If you notice any of the following conditions gently clean the surface of the reader with a dry soft lint free cloth e The surface of the reader is dirty or stained e The surface of the reader is wet e The reader often fails to enroll or authenticate your fingerprint If your finger has any of the following conditions you may not be able to register or authenticate it e Your finger is wrinkled e Your finger is rough dry or injured 104 User Guide e Your finger is very dry e Your finger is stained with dirt mud or oil e The surface of your finger is very different from when you enrolled your fingerprint e Your finger is wet e A finger is used that h
274. plication navigation window is dimmed it indicates that you need to install the application manually To install the application manually double click the application icon Then follow the instructions on the screen When the installation process completes the application icon will be activated Table 1 Applications on Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools Active Protection System Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox Mobile Broadband Activate ThinkVantage GPS GPS Lenovo ThinkVantage Tablet Shortcut Menu e You can also get the applications from the Control Panel Click Start gt Control Panel Depending on the application you want to access click the corresponding section and then click the corresponding green text Note If you do not find the application you need in Control Panel open the Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools application navigation window and double click the dimmed icon to install the application you need Chapter 1 Product Overview 33 Then follow the instructions on the screen When the installation process completes the application icon will be activated and you can find the application in Control Panel The sections in Control Panel the green texts and the applications are listed in the following table Table 2 Applications in Control Panel Application Control Panel section Green text in Control Panel Network and Internet Lenovo Internet Connection Active Protection System System and Security Lenovo Airbag Protection H
275. power adapter or using the battery and the battery status indicator is on is green press Fn Home to make the screen brighter Ifthe sleep standby status indicator is on is green press Fn to resume from the sleep Standby mode If the problem persists do the Solution in the problem below Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model it does not support the presentation scheme e Problem The screen is unreadable or distorted 218 User Guide Solution Make sure that The display device driver is installed correctly The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set The monitor type is correct To check these settings do as follows For Windows 7 1 Click Display at the left Select Change display settings Check whether the screen resolution is correctly set Click Advanced Settings Click the Adapter tab Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window ona W DY Right click on the desktop and click Personalize Note The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer Click the Properties button If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation Check the Device status box and make sure the device is working properly If not click the Troubleshoot button Close the Properties window Click the Monitor tab Check whet
276. powerful computer chip dedicated to the security functions of your computer To start the Client Security Solution click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Client Security Solution For details refer to the Help for the program You can download the latest Client Security Solution at http www lenovo com support Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model Client Security Solution is not preinstalled on it Fingerprint Software If your system comes with a fingerprint reader the Fingerprint Software program enables you to enroll your fingerprint and associate it with your Windows password As a result the fingerprint authentication can replace your password and enable simple and secure user access To open the fingerprint software do the following e Windows 7 See Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 e For Windows Vista and Windows XP Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt ThinkVantage Fingerprint Software Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools The Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools program helps you work more easily and securely by providing easy access to various technologies such as e Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox e Power Manager e Rescue and Recovery e System Update Chapter 1 Product Overview 35 To access the Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools program click Start gt All Programs gt Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools Note Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools is only available on computers preinstalled with
277. pport Center for assistance 4 While the computer is off remove all sources of power and external hardware Refer to the procedure in Replacing memory on page 143 on how to remove and reseat the memory modules Remove any non original memory module added to your computer After removing the extra memory module and reseating the original memory module repeat step 2 If the computer still does not turn on consult the user s reference guide for other customer replaceable components that are attached to your computer If the computer still does not start up call the Customer Support Center and a Customer Support Specialist will assist you Spills on the keyboard With a mobile computer there are increased chances of spilling liquids on the keyboard Because most liquids conduct electricity liquid spilled on the keyboard could create numerous short circuits potentially causing irreparable damage to your computer If you spill something on your computer Attention Be sure that no liquid creates a short circuit between you and the ac power adapter if in use Although you might lose some data or work by turning off the computer immediately leaving the computer on might make your computer unusable 1 Carefully unplug the ac power adapter immediately 2 Turn off the computer immediately If the computer does not turn off remove the battery The more quickly you stop the current from passing through the computer the more likely you
278. printed books online books README files and help files In addition information about Lenovo products is available on the World Wide Web Microsoft Service Packs are the latest software source for Windows product updates They are available via Web download connection charges may apply or via disc For more specific information and links please go to http www microsoft com Lenovo offers Up and Running technical assistance with installation of or questions related to Service Packs for your Lenovo preloaded Microsoft Windows product For information please contact the Customer Support Center Using diagnostic programs Many computer problems can be solved without outside assistance If you experience a problem with your computer the first place to start is the troubleshooting information of your computer documentation If you suspect a software problem see the documentation including README files and online help that comes with the operating system or application program ThinkPad notebooks come with a set of diagnostic programs that you can use to help you identify hardware problems See Diagnosing problems on page 207 for instructions on using the diagnostic programs The Troubleshooting information or the diagnostic programs might tell you that you need additional or updated device drivers or other software Lenovo maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you can get the latest technical information and download device drive
279. puter from being used by others Once you set a password a prompt appears on the screen each time you power on the computer Enter your password at the prompt You cannot use the computer unless you type the correct password Make sure that only authorized individuals access your computer Establishing different kinds of passwords requires that other possible users know the proper passwords in order to access your computer or your data LJ If this icon appears enter the Power on password or Supervisor password If this icon appears enter the Hard disk password 2 If this icon appears enter the Supervisor password Click on the items below to find out more about passwords and how to use them to protect your computer e Passwords and sleep standby mode on page 90 e Power on password on page 90 e Hard disk security on page 95 Copyright Lenovo 2011 89 e Supervisor password on page 93 Passwords and sleep standby mode If you have set passwords and you put your computer into sleep standby mode by pressing Fn F4 the procedure for resuming operation is as follows e You are not prompted to type the password when resuming operation e f any hard disk or the solid state drive has a hard disk password it is unlocked automatically when you resume operation Typing passwords A C a If this icon appears enter the Power on password or Supervisor password Ha If this icon appears enter the H
280. puter off and then turn it on again When the logo screen is displayed press F1 The ThinkPad Setup opens Select Security using the cursor directional keys to move down the menu Select Password Select Supervisor Password A window opens that prompts you to enter a new password Choose your supervisor password and type it in the Enter New Password field then press Enter Press Enter to move to the next line Retype the password you just entered to verify it O O AON Oa FW PD i vk Commit your password to memory and press Enter A Setup Notice window is displayed Attention You might want to note your password and keep it in a safe place If you forget your supervisor password Lenovo can not reset your password You must take your computer to a Lenovo reseller or a Lenovo marketing representative to have the system board replaced Proof of purchase is required and a fee will be charged for parts and service 12 Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window The next time you open the ThinkPad Setup you will be prompted to type your password to proceed Changing or removing the supervisor password To change or remove the supervisor password follow steps 1 through 8 above in Setting a supervisor password on page 94 typing your password to get access to the ThinkPad Setup To change the password do the following 1 In the Enter Current Password field type the current supervisor password 2 In the En
281. r 11 Click OK to apply the changes e Problem Display switching does not work Solution If you use the Extend desktop function disable it and change the display output location If a DVD movie or a video clip is playing stop the playback close the application and then change the display output location e Problem If you use the Extend desktop function you cannot set a higher resolution or higher refresh rate on the secondary display Solution Change the resolution and the color depth to lower settings for the primary display by doing the following For Windows 7 Change the resolution depth to lower settings for the primary display Refer to the Solution for The Extend desktop function does not work above For Windows Vista Using the Display Settings window change the resolution and the color depth to lower settings for the primary display To launch the Display Settings window refer to the Solution for The Extend desktop function does not work above For Windows XP Using the Display Properties window change the resolution and the color depth to lower settings for the primary display To launch the Display Properties window refer to the Solution for The Extend desktop function does not work above e Problem The screen position on the external monitor is incorrect when that monitor is set for a high resolution Solution Sometimes when you use a high resolution such as 1600x1200 the
282. r Solution Check the newly shared files as follows 1 In the menu of My Bluetooth Places click View 2 Click Update The status is updated in the window so that you can check the newly shared files Make sure that the shared folder in the connected computer contains the files you are looking for Make sure that the security settings on the connected computer allow you to connect and view the files in the computer e Problem Your computer is connected to a Bluetooth enabled computer but you cannot gain access to the network Solution Make sure that the Bluetooth enabled computer is connected to a network Make sure that the connected computer has been set up to share its network connectivity and that the security settings allow you to connect and establish the remote network access e Problem Your computer cannot connect a Bluetooth enabled computer that uses serial port applications Solution Reestablish a connection with the Bluetooth enabled computer and try the serial connection again e Problem Bluetooth serial port was disconnected automatically Solution When any serial based connection is established an inactivity timer starts If no application opens the port the connection is ended automatically This is a normal characteristic of the serial based connection and is not a defect If you need the Bluetooth serial port just reconnect it e Problem PIM Synchronization failed with an error message The Synchronizat
283. r adapter To change the default brightness level change the settings of the Power Option in the Control Panel or use the Power Manager Fn End The computer display becomes dimmer The purpose of this method is to change the brightness level temporarily On Windows Vista the default brightness level is loaded after sleep standby hibernation reboot or detaching or attaching an ac power adapter To change the default brightness level change the settings of the Power Option in the Control Panel or use the Power Manager Fn Spacebar Enable the FullScreen Magnifier function Fn F2 Lock your computer Fn F8 Change the settings of the UltraNav pointing device Fn PrtSc Have the same function as the SysRq key Fn ScrLk Enable or disable the numeric keypad The indicator of numeric lock is displayed on the screen Fn Pause Have the same function as the Break key Fn cursor keys These key combinations are for use with Windows Media Player They have the following functions Fn down arrow key Play or Pause Fn up arrow key Stop Fn right arrow key Next Track Fn left arrow key Previous Track Chapter 2 Using your computer 51 Volume and mute buttons You can adjust the sound level of the built in speakers by using the following three buttons If you mute the sound and then turn off your computer the sound will remain muted when you turn on your computer again To turn on the sound press the plus
284. r does not work Solution If the system does not return from sleep standby mode it may have entered sleep standby or hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted Check the sleep standby indicator If the sleep standby indicator is on your computer is in sleep standby mode Connect the ac power adapter to the computer then press Fn If the sleep standby indicator is off your computer is in hibernation mode or power off state Connect the ac power adapter to the computer then press the power button to resume operation If the system still does not return from sleep standby mode your system may stop responding and you may not be able to turn off the computer In this case you need to reset the computer If you have not saved your data it may be lost To reset the computer press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more If the system is still not reset remove the ac power adapter and the battery Problem Your computer does not enter sleep Standby or hibernation mode Solution Check whether any option has been selected to disable your computer from entering sleep standby or hibernation mode If your computer tries to enter sleep standby mode but the request is rejected the device in the USB connector might be disabled If this occurs do a hot unplug and plug operation for the USB device Problem The Fn F12 key combination does not make the computer enter hibernation mode Solutio
285. r for driver software and then click Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer 9 Click Have Disk Specify path C SWTOOLS DRIVERS MONITOR to this monitor INF then click Open ON DOO FB WD 4 O Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 179 11 12 13 14 15 16 Click OK Confirm the correct display type then click Next Windows has finished installing Click Close Click Close for Display Properties Click OK in the Monitor tab Click OK and close the Display Settings window For Windows XP ON DOO FB WD ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 2 NOOR OND 0 18 19 20 21 22 Right click on the desktop and select Properties from the pop up menu Select the Settings tab Click the Advanced tab Select the Monitor tab Select Plug and Play Monitor from the monitor type list Click Properties Select the Driver tab and click Update Driver The Hardware Update Wizard starts Select No not this time for Windows Update connection and then click Next Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next Select Don t search will choose the driver to install Click Next Click Have Disk Click Browse Specify C SWTOOLS DRIVERS MONITOR as location directory and select TPLCD INF Click OK System will show ThinkPad Display Click Next System will copy ThinkPad Monitor INF file and color profile Click Finish and then Close Cli
286. rough extrapolation Actual results may vary Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment Copyright Lenovo 2011 251 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States other countries or both Lenovo Access Connections Active Protection System Rescue and Recovery ThinkLight ThinkPad ThinkVantage TrackPoint Ultrabay Ultrabase UltraConnect UltraNav Intel and Intel SpeedStep are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Bing and BitLocker are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies BlackBerry RIM Research In Motion SureType and related trademarks names and logos are the property of Research In Motion Limited and are registered and or used in the U S and countries around the world Used under license from Research In Motion Limited Other company product and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others 252 User Guide ThinkPad
287. rs and updates Lenovo support Web site Technical support information is available at http www lenovo com support This portal is updated with the latest information about the following subjects e Downloads amp Drivers Download drivers flash BIOS and update your software e Warranty Check your warranty status and upgrade your warranty e Technical Support Click Need Help for self help tips to help diagnose a problem e ThinkVantage Learn more about ThinkVantage software to improve productivity and reduce cost e Lenovo Forums Search the community knowledge base for your computer to share and discover information with other users e User Guides amp Manuals Read or print any publications related to your product Calling Lenovo If you have tried to correct the problem yourself and still need help during the warranty period you can get help and information by telephone through the Customer Support Center The following services are available during the warranty period e Problem determination Trained personnel are available to assist you with determining if you have a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the problem 236 User Guide e Lenovo hardware repair If the problem is determined to be caused by Lenovo hardware under warranty trained service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service e Engineering change management Occasionally there might be changes that
288. s e Fingerprint reader on some models 28 User Guide ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet features Processor e See the system properties of your computer You can do this as follows Click Start right click Computer in Windows XP My Computer then from the pull down menu select Properties Memory e Double data rate 3 DDR3 synchronous dynamic random access memory Storage device e 2 5 inch 76 mm solid state drive or 2 5 inch 64 mm hard disk drive e mSATA solid state drive on some models Display The color display uses TFT technology e Size 12 5 inch 317 5 mm e Resolution LCD 1366 by 768 External monitor Up to 2560 by 1600 e LED backlight e Brightness control Keyboard e 89 key 90 key or 94 key e UltraNav TrackPoint and multi touch click pad e Fn key function e ThinkVantage button e Volume control buttons e Speaker mute button e Microphone mute button Interface e External monitor connectors e Combo audio jack stereo headphone or headset e 3 Universal Serial Bus connectors e RJ45 Ethernet connector e ExpressCard slot e 4 in 1 digital media card reader e Docking connector e DisplayPort connector Optical drive in ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 e DVD drive e DVD Multi Burner drive Chapter 1 Product Overview 29 Wireless features e Integrated wireless LAN on some models e Integrated Bluetooth on some models e Integrated wireless WAN on some models e Integra
289. s any equipment that will be attached to this product Whenever possible use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire water or structural damage Disconnect the attached power cords battery pack and all the cables before you open the device covers unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures Do not use you computer until all internal parts enclosures are fastened into place Never use the computer when internal parts and circuits are exposed Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing moving or opening covers on this product or attached devices To connect To disconnect Turn everything OFF 1 Turn everything OFF Attach all cables to devices 2 Remove power cords from outlets Attach signal cables to connectors 3 Remove signal cables from connectors Attach power cords to outlets 4 Remove all cables from devices Turn devices ON The power cord must be disconnected from the wall outlet or receptacle before installing all other electrical cables connected to the computer The power cord may be reconnected to the wall outlet or receptacle only after all other electrical cables have been connected to the computer Liquid crystal display LCD notice CAUTION The LCD is made of glass and rough handling or dropping the computer can cause the LCD to break If the LCD
290. s the UltraNav touch pad to move the pointer The TrackPoint and TrackPoint buttons provide functions similar to those of a mouse and its buttons EJ Fn key Use the Fn key to take advantage of ThinkPad functions such as turning on the ThinkLight To use ThinkPad functions press Fn the required function key marked in blue Eq CapsLock indicator The indicator of CapsLock is located on the CapsLock key For more information about CapsLock indicator see ThinkPad X220 and X220i status indicators on page 18 Eg ThinkVantage button You can also use the ThinkVantage button to interrupt the startup sequence of your computer and start the Rescue and Recovery workspace which runs independently of the Windows operating system and is hidden from it Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox will be displayed Volume control buttons The built in volume buttons enable you to quickly adjust the volume or mute the sound from your computer For details refer to the instructions in Volume and mute buttons on page 52 E Built in microphones The built in microphones capture sound and voice when they are used with an application program capable of handling audio 4 User Guide ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet front view Figure 2 Front view Wireless WAN auxiliary and Wireless E Integrated camera LAN WiMAX auxiliary Ell Built in microphones EJ Wireless LAN third Wirele
291. schedule System Restore to take a system snapshot periodically For more information about System Restore see Chapter 5 Recovery overview on page 107 8 Update device drivers and UEFI BIOS when needed 9 Profile your machine at http www lenovo com think support to keep up to date with current drivers and revisions 10 Keep up to date for device drivers on other non Lenovo hardware You might want to read the device driver information release notes prior to updating for compatibility or known issues 11 Keep a log book Entries might include major hardware or software changes driver updates minor issues you have experienced and how you resolved them 12 If you ever need to run a recovery on your computer to return the preload onto the machine the following tips might help along the way e Remove all external devices such as the printer keyboard etc e Make sure that your battery is charged and that you have the ac power connected e Boot into the ThinkPad Setup and load the default settings e Restart the machine and start the recovery e If your machine uses discs as the recovery media DO NOT remove the disc from the drive until prompted to do so 13 For suspected hard disk drive issues refer to Diagnosing problems on page 207 and run Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox for a diagnostic test of the drive prior to calling the Customer Support Center If your computer does not start up download the files to create a boota
292. sk password has been the user must enter the user hard disk password in order to gain access to files and applications on the hard disk The master password can be set and used only by a system administrator Like a master key it enables the administrator to get access to any hard drive in a system The administrator sets the master hard disk password and no one else knows it Then the administrator sets a user hard disk password for each computer in the network and tells each user the password for his or her computer The user can change the user hard disk password as desired but the administrator can still get access by using the master password Note When a master hard disk password is set only the administrator can remove the user hard disk password Setting a hard disk password 1 Print these instructions Save all open files and exit all applications Turn your computer off and then on again When the logo screen is displayed press F1 The ThinkPad Setup opens Select Security using the cursor directional keys to move down the menu Select Password NO oO FB W DY Select Hard Disk x Password where x is the number of the hard disk drive for which you want to set a password Chapter 4 Security 91 A Setup Confirmation window opens You are prompted to select User or User Master Select User if you want to set only one hard disk password If you are an administrator or supervisor you can select User Master to s
293. ss WAN main and Wireless LAN WiMAX main H Computer display i Fingerprint reader Power switch EJ ThinkVantage button EPC Express Mini Card slot for wireless PCI Express Mini Card slot for wireless WAN or mSATA LAN WiMAX solid state drive SSD E TrackPoint pointing stick EH TrackPoint buttons Touch pad CapsLock indicator Fn key ETJ Volume control buttons System and power status indicators EEJ Tablet Buttons Built in stereo speakers Chapter 1 Product Overview 5 Fa Wireless WAN auxiliary and Wireless LAN WiMAX auxiliary E Wireless LAN third Wireless WAN main and Wireless LAN WiMAX main The built in antennas for the wireless communication are located at the top left and the top right portions of your computer display For the specific locations of each antenna refer to Location of the UltraConnect wireless antennas on page 244 H Integrated camera Some models have the integrated camera By using this camera you can take pictures or hold a video conference For more information about how to use the camera refer to Using an integrated camera on page 78 E Built in microphones The built in microphones capture sound and voice when they are used with an application program capable of handling audio i Computer display The high resolution thin film transistor TFT display provides clear and brilliant text and graphics For details refer to the instructions in Changing display settings
294. switch from one device to another for example from a speaker to a headphone or from an external microphone to a built in microphone do as follows 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound 2 Click the SmartAudio icon The SmartAudio window opens 3 Make sure that you are in MULTI STREAM mode in the Audio Director window 4 In the Volume Mixer window select the device you want for example speakers If your computer is attached to a ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus or a ThinkPad Mini Dock you can also select a device from them 5 Play any sound via a music program for example Windows Media Player Make sure that sound comes from speakers now 6 Then if you would like to switch to a headphone close the music program 7 Go to the Volume Mixer window Then select another device which is now the headphone 8 Play any sound via the music program Make sure that sound comes from a headphone attached directly to the system For details refer to the Help for SmartAudio Note In the Volume Mixer window of SmartAudio a check mark by the entry for a device such as speakers for a playback device or a built in microphone for a recording device shows that the device has been selected Chapter 10 Troubleshooting computer problems 227 e Problem When you connect a headphone to your computer while playing sound a speaker does not produce sound in the MULTI STREAM mode at SmartAudio Windows 7 Solution Once the
295. swords beforehand you can start the computer log on to the system and enter the ThinkPad Setup by 100 User Guide swiping your finger over the reader without typing a password Thus fingerprint authentication can replace passwords and enable simple and secure user access For more advanced security Client Security Solution can be installed The software is compatible with a variety of user authentication mechanisms such as those involving fingerprint authentication This fingerprint reader can work with the software Note If your computer is a Windows 7 model Client Security Solution is not preinstalled on it Enrolling your fingerprint 1 Turn on your computer 2 To start Lenovo Fingerprint software refer to Fingerprint Software on page 35 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to enroll your fingerprint For details refer to the Help for the program LED behavior of the fingerprint reader Table 5 LED behavior list_fingerprint reader Indicator Description S LED blinks green The fingerprint is being authenticated or has been el LED is solid green The The fingerprint reader is ready to swipe reader is ready to swipe LED blinks amber The fingerprint could not be authenticated Swiping your finger over the reader To swipe your finger over the reader in notebook mode do as follows Chapter 4 Security 101 1 Place the ball of your finger that is the central part of the fingerprint on the sma
296. t any time without notice The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons The information contained in this document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties Nothing in this document shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an illustration The result obtained in other operating environments may vary Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Any references in this publication to non Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Lenovo product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment Therefore the result obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly Some measurements may have been made on development level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems Furthermore some measurements may have been estimated th
297. t not use the correct driver or the driver is not enabled To update the driver right click the highlighted adapter 5 Click Properties The Properties window appears 6 Click the Driver tab 7 Click the Update Driver button The Update Device Driver wizard appears Follow the instructions on the screen The switch port and the adapter have the same duplex setting If you configured the adapter for full duplex make sure the switch port is also configured for full duplex Setting the wrong duplex mode can degrade performance cause data loss or result in lost connections You have installed all networking software that is necessary for your network environment Check with your LAN administrator for the necessary networking software e Problem The adapter stops working for no apparent reason Solution The network driver files may be corrupt or missing Update the driver by referring to the Solution description for the procedure to make sure that the correct device driver is installed in the preceding problem e Problem If your computer is a Gigabit Ethernet model and you use the a speed of 1000 Mbps the connection fails or errors occur Solution Use Category 5 wiring and make sure that the network cable is securely connected Connect to a 1000 BASE T hub switch not 1000 BASE X e Problem The Wake on LAN WOL feature is not working Solution Make sure that WOL is enabled in the ThinkPad Setup
298. t the external monitor to the monitor connector then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet 2 Turn on the external monitor 3 Press Fn F7 then select Extend To change the resolution for each monitor do as follows 1 Right click on the desktop and click Screen resolution Click the Monitor 1 icon for the primary display the computer display Select the Resolution of the primary display Click the Monitor 2 icon for the secondary display the external display Select the Resolution of the secondary display Place the icons for the monitors so that they touch Oonrk Ww PY Note You can set the monitors in any relative position but the icons must touch each other 7 Click OK to apply the changes Note To change the color settings right click on the desktop and click Screen resolution Click Advanced Settings select the Monitor tab then set Colors 76 User Guide For Windows Vista 1 Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet 2 Turn on the external monitor 3 If this is the first time the external monitor has been connected the New Display Detected dialog box opens Select Show different parts of my desktop on each display extended and then click OK To change the resolution for each monitor do as follows 1 Right click on the desktop and click Personalize 2 Click Display Settings The Display Settings window opens 3 Click the Moni
299. taaten und halt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse B ein Um dieses sicherzustellen sind die Ger te wie in den Handbuchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben Des Weiteren d rfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung f r die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo ver ndert bzw wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt eingebaut werden Deutschland Einhaltung des Gesetzes Uber die elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit von Betriebsmitteln Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz Uber die elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit von Betriebsmitteln EMVG fr her Gesetz Uber die elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit von Ger ten Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU Richtlinie 2004 1 08 EG fr her 89 336 EWG in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz Uber die elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln EMVG vom 20 Juli 2007 fr her Gesetz Uber die elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit von Ger ten bzw der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004 108 EC fr her 89 336 EWG fur Gerate der Klasse B Dieses Ger t ist berechtigt in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG Konformitatszeichen CE zu f hren Verantwortlich f r die Konformitatserklarung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo Deutschland GmbH Gropiusplatz 10 D 70563 Stuttgart
300. tation or port replicator problem es Ses Copyright Lenovo 2011 182 182 183 184 185 185 197 197 198 199 201 201 202 202 202 203 205 207 207 207 207 208 208 209 211 212 212 212 217 218 228 228 232 232 233 233 233 Chapter 11 Getting panes Before you contact Lenovo Register your computer Download system updates Record information Getting help and service Using diagnostic programs Lenovo support Web site Calling Lenovo Purchasing additional services Appendix A ees Information r Wireless related information Location of the UltraConnect PN antennas Locating wireless regut notices Export classification notice Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission Declaration of Conformity Industry Canada Class B emission conne statement European Union Garnlance to Sine Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive German Class B compliance statement Korea Class B compliance statement Japan VCCI Class B compliance statement Japan compliance statement for products which connect to the power mains with rated current less than or equal to 20 A per phase Lenovo product service information for Taiwan Pointer to the printed pub fot additional regulatory information a Appendix B WEEE and P reaenng statements EU WEEE statements Japan recycling statements Appendix C Notices Trademarks 235 235 235 235 235 236 236 23
301. te Product Recovery discs on the Windows XP operating system click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Create Recovery Media Then follow the instructions on the screen Using recovery media This section provides instructions on how to use recovery media on different operating systems On the Windows 7 operating system and the Windows Vista operating system you can use recovery media to restore the computer to the factory default settings only You can use recovery media to put the computer in an operational state after all other methods of recovery have failed Attention When you use recovery media to restore the computer to the factory default settings all the files currently on the hard disk drive will be deleted and replaced by the factory default settings To use recovery media on the Windows 7 operating system or the Windows Vista operating system do the following 1 Depending on the type of your recovery media connect the boot medium memory key or other USB storage device to the computer or insert the boot disc into the optical drive 2 Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer When the Startup Device Menu opens release the F12 key 3 Select the desired startup device and press Enter The restore process begins 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the operation Notes 1 After restoring your computer to the factory default settings you might have to reinstall
302. ted docking station supported supported Microphone function not supported Microphone jack of the Not supported Not supported Microphone function docking station supported Beam Forming feature A built in dual array digital microphone is mounted at the top of the display Whereas a conventional single element microphone captures sounds from all around the built in dual array digital microphone is designed to capture the sound from an exceptionally limited angle through the combination of a specialized microphone array with a capability of digital signal processing Therefore the microphone captures sounds from the area in front of the system clearly but blocks out almost all the sounds from outside the capturing range Thus the speech of a user sitting in front of the system is input to the system without interference from noise in the surrounding area To record your speech most clearly you should speak directly in front of the computer Configuring for sound recording To configure the microphone for optimized sound recording open the SmartAudio window as follows For Windows 7 and Windows Vista Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt SmartAudio The SmartAudio window opens For Windows XP Click Start gt Control Panel Switch to Classic View and click SmartAudio The SmartAudio window opens Using an integrated camera If your computer has an integrated camera when you press Fn F6 to open the Commun
303. ted WiMAX on some models Security features e Fingerprint reader on some models Tablet features e Tablet Digitizer Pen e Touch panel on select models Specifications This section provides specifications for your computer ThinkPad X220 and X220i specifications Size e Width 305 0 mm 12 inch e Depth 206 5 mm 8 13 inch e Height 19 to 26 6 mm 0 75 inch to 1 05 inch Environment e Maximum altitude without pressurization 3048 m 10 000 ft e Temperature At altitudes up to 2438 m 8000 ft Operating 5 0 C to 35 0 C 41 F to 95 F Non operating 5 0 C to 43 0 C 41 F to 109 F At altitudes above 2438 m 8000 ft Maximum temperature when operating under the unpressurized condition 31 3 C 88 F Note When you charge the battery pack its temperature must be at least 10 C 50 F e Relative humidity Operating 8 to 80 Non operating 5 to 95 Heat output e 65 W 222 Btu hr maximum or 90 W 307 Btu hr maximum depending on the model Power source ac power adapter e Sine wave input at 50 to 60 Hz e Input rating of the ac power adapter 100 to 240 V AC 50 to 60 Hz 30 User Guide Battery pack e Lithium ion Li lon battery pack Battery life e For percentage of remaining battery power see the Power Manager Battery Gauge in the task bar e The Power Manager also displays a green yellow and red indication A battery under warranty with a red indication
304. ter New Password field type the new supervisor password then retype the password you just entered to verify it in the Confirm New Password field 94 User Guide 3 Follow step 11 and step 12 above in Setting a supervisor password on page 94 to change your supervisor password To remove the password do the following 1 In the Enter Current Password field type the current supervisor password 2 Leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields in blank 3 Follow step 11 and step 12 above in Setting a supervisor password on page 94 to remove your supervisor password Hard disk security Your computer supports an enhanced security solution for solid state drive or hard disk drive To protect passwords from unauthorized security attacks several of the latest technologies and algorithms are integrated into UEFI BIOS and hardware design of ThinkPad notebooks To maximize security do the following 1 Set a power on password as well as a hard disk password for your internal solid state drive or hard disk drive Refer to the procedures in Power on password on page 90 and Hard disk passwords on page 91 For security a longer password is recommended 2 To provide reliable security for UEFI BIOS use the security chip and a security application with a Trusted Platform Module management feature Refer to Setting the security chip on page 96 Note Microsoft Windows 7 and Windows Vista support TPM ma
305. that country Other items you may wish to consider e ThinkPad ac dc Combo Adapter e External storage device e Phone line splitter in case you need to dial manually or use your modem without disconnecting the phone line Chapter 3 You and your computer 87 88 User Guide Chapter 4 Security This chapter provides information about how to protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use e Attaching a mechanical lock on page 89 e Using passwords on page 89 e Hard disk security on page 95 e Setting the security chip on page 96 e Using a fingerprint reader on page 97 e Notice on deleting data from your hard disk drive or solid state drive on page 105 e Using and understanding firewalls on page 106 e Protecting data against viruses on page 106 Attaching a mechanical lock You can attach a mechanical lock to your computer to help prevent it from being removed without your permission Attach a mechanical lock to the keyhole of the computer then secure the chain on the lock to a stationary object Refer to the instructions shipped with the mechanical lock Note You are responsible for evaluating selecting and implementing the locking devices and security features Lenovo makes no comments judgments or warranties about the function quality or performance of locking devices and security features Using passwords By using passwords you can help prevent your com
306. the Security menu of the ThinkPad Setup offers the following choices e Predesktop Authentication Enables or disables fingerprint authentication before the operating system is loaded e Reader Priority Defines the priority for fingerprint readers if an external fingerprint reader is attached e Security Mode Specifies the settings of the security mode e Password Authentication Enables or disables password authentication Note This item appears if High security mode is selected e Reset Fingerprint Data By choosing this item you erase all of the fingerprint data stored in either the internal or external fingerprint reader Chapter 4 Security 99 To set an item in the fingerprint submenu 1 Print these instructions To configure the fingerprint reader you must turn your computer off and then on again Save all open files and exit all applications Turn your computer off and then on again When the logo screen is displayed press F1 The ThinkPad Setup opens Using the cursor keys move to Security and press Enter The Security menu opens Using the cursor keys move to Fingerprint and press Enter The Fingerprint submenu opens Using the cursor keys move to an item you want to set When that item is highlighted press Enter Set the items you want to set Press F10 to exit O O AN DOA FW PD i In the Setup Confirmation window select Yes Care for the fingerprint reader The following actions
307. the disk however it cannot be Chapter 4 Security 105 decrypted without the old key This feature is enabled by the ThinkPad Setup Menu Extension Utility and is available as a menu item in the ThinkPad Setup Using and understanding firewalls If your system is preintalled with a firewall program it protects against computer Internet security threats unauthorized access intrusions and Internet attacks It also protects your privacy For more information about how to use the firewall program refer to the on line help that comes with the program Protecting data against viruses Your computer is preinstalled with an antivirus program so you can detect and eliminate viruses The antivirus program is designed to help you detect and eliminate viruses Lenovo provides a full version of antivirus software on your computer with a free 30 day subscription After 30 days you must renew the license to continue receiving the antivirus software updates For more information about how to use your antivirus software refer to the help system of your antivirus software 106 User Guide Chapter 5 Recovery overview This chapter provides information about the recovery solutions provided by Lenovo This chapter contains the following topics e Creating and using recovery media on page 107 e Performing backup and recovery operations on page 109 e Using the Rescue and Recovery workspace on page 110 e Creating
308. tion of Effective Utilization of Resources Computers and monitors are categorized as industrial waste and should be properly disposed of by an industrial waste disposal contractor certified by a local government In accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources Lenovo Japan provides through its PC Collecting and Recycling Services for the collecting reuse and recycling of disused computers and monitors For details visit the Lenovo Web site at www ibm com jp pc service recycle pcrecycle Pursuant to the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources the collecting and recycling of home used computers and monitors by the manufacturer was begun on October 1 2003 This service is provided free of charge for home used computers sold after October 1 2003 For details visit the Lenovo Web site at www iom com jp pc service recycle personal Copyright Lenovo 2011 249 Disposing of a Lenovo computer components Some Lenovo computer products sold in Japan may have components that contain heavy metals or other environmental sensitive substances To properly dispose of disused components such as a printed circuit board or drive use the methods described above for collecting and recycling a disused computer or monitor Disposing of disused lithium batteries from Lenovo computers A button shaped lithium battery is installed on the system board of your Lenovo computer to provide power to the computer clock
309. tion on resume from sleep e Fix for Issue of HDD with HD Detection To install these Registry Patches go to http www lenovo com support Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 175 Installing the Windows Vista Update Module Package The Windows Vista Update Modules are in the following directory C SWTOOLS OSFIXES The name of each subfolder is the number of a fix module For information about each fix module go to the Microsoft Knowledge Base homepage at http support microsoft com type the number of the fix module you need in the search field and click Search Note The Web site address might change without notice If the homepage is not displayed search for it from the Microsoft top page To install a fix module run the exe file in a subfolder and follow the instructions on the screen Note If you remove the hard disk drive from the computer with a single core processor and install it on a computer with a dual core processor you can get access to the hard disk drive The opposite however is not true If you remove the hard disk drive from a computer with a dual core processor and install it on a computer with a single core processor you cannot get access to the hard disk drive Installing Windows XP Before you start print these instructions Note Only ThinkPad X220 and ThinkPad X220i support Windows XP Note Your computer supports Windows XP with Service Pack 3 Before you install the Windows XP Service Pack 3 make
310. tions for your computer Following sections provide information about ThinkVantage technologies and other computing solutions offered by Lenovo e Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 e Access Connections on page 34 e Active Protection System on page 35 e Client Security Solution on page 35 e Fingerprint Software on page 35 e Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools on page 35 e Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox on page 36 e Message Center Plus on page 36 e Password Manager on page 36 e Power Manager on page 36 e Presentation Director on page 37 32 User Guide e Product Recovery on page 37 e Rescue and Recovery on page 37 e System Update on page 37 e ThinkVantage GPS on page 37 e Lenovo SimpleTap on page 38 e Lenovo ThinkVantage Tablet Shortcut Menu on page 38 Note To learn more about ThinkVantage technologies and other computing solutions offered by Lenovo go to http www lenovo com support Accessing applications in Windows 7 If you are using the Windows 7 operating system you can access applications by following one of the methods below e You can get the applications from the Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools Click Start gt All Programs gt Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools Then depending on the application you want to access double click the corresponding icon Note If an application icon in the Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools ap
311. to bring the computer out of Standby check box Asset ID EEPROM The Asset ID EEPROM contains information about the system including its configuration and the serial numbers of key components It also includes a number of blank fields in which you can record information about the end users in your network Setting management features To enable the network administrator to control your computer remotely you must configure the network interface by setting the system management features in the ThinkPad Setup That ThinkPad Setup contains the following functions e Wake on LAN e Network boot sequence e Flash update If an administrator s password Supervisor password has been set you will need to specify it when you start the ThinkPad Setup so that you can use these functions Wake on LAN When the Wake on LAN feature is enabled on a computer that is connected to a LAN a network administrator can start the computer remotely from a management console using remote network management software Setting up in the ThinkPad Setup To enable or disable Wake on LAN go to the ThinkPad Setup menu When your computer is not under the network administrator s system management you can disable Wake on LAN To set this function do the following 1 Start the ThinkPad Setup menu Select Config The Config submenu appears Select Network The Network item submenu appears For Wake On LAN select one of the following AC Only AC and B
312. to the next line Retype the password you just entered to verify it Commit your password to memory and press Enter A Setup Notice window is displayed Attention You might want to note your passwords and keep them in a safe place Otherwise if you forget the user only password or both user and master passwords Lenovo cannot reset your passwords or recover data from the hard disk You must take your computer to a Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced Proof of purchase is required and a fee will be charged for parts and service Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window The next time you turn on your computer you will have to type the user or master hard disk password in order to start your computer and get access to your operating system Changing or removing a hard disk password Follow steps 1 through 7 in Setting a hard disk password on page 91 above typing your password to get access to the ThinkPad Setup program To 92 change or remove the User only hard disk password do as follows To change the hard disk password type the current password in the Enter Current Password field Then type the new password in the Enter New Password field and retype the password you just entered to verify it in the Confirm New Password field Press Enter and a Setup Notice window is displayed Press F10 to exit from the Setup Notice window The user hard disk password will be changed
313. tooth software as follows a Turn Bluetooth power on Microsoft Bluetooth software is loaded automatically b If the Found New Hardware Wizard window pops up do the following 1 Select No not this time and then click Next 2 Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced then click Next 3 Select Search for the best driver in those locations 4 Select Include this location in the search and type C SWTOOLS Drivers MSBTooth or specify the location in which you placed the extracted INF file Then click Next c Click Finish Installing ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software in Windows XP If you are using the Microsoft Bluetooth software and want to use ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software instead replace the Microsoft Bluetooth software with ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate Software as follows 1 Press Fn F5 to turn the Bluetooth power on 2 Click Start gt Run 3 Type C SWTOOLS Drivers TPBTooth Setup exe or specify the full path to the setup exe file you have downloaded from http Awww lenovo com support then click OK 4 Click Next 5 Select accept the terms in the license agreement then click Next 6 Click Next to select the default destination folder If you need to change the destination folder click Change select or enter the name of the destination folder in the Change current destination folder window and click OK 7 Click Install to begin installati
314. tor e You can use this connector for a 1OBASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Ethernet If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 and use an Ethernet connector use the Ethernet connector on the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 not the one on the computer i The Universal Serial Bus connectors are for connecting USB 1 1 and USB 2 0 devices The power jack is for connecting the ac power adapter EJ The eSATA is for connecting an eSATA device EJ The external monitor connector is for connecting an external monitor Note If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 and use an external monitor connector use the external monitor connector on the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 not the one on the computer Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer 165 When you attach a mechanical lock to the security keyhole the eject button is locked so that the computer cannot be removed from the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 Attaching a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 To attach your computer to a ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 a ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or a ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 do the following The following drawings are for the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 or the ThinkPad Mini Dock Plus Series 3 The procedure is the same for the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 Notes e Before you attach the computer to a ThinkPad
315. tor 1 icon for the primary display the computer display 4 Select the Resolution and the Colors of the primary display 5 Click the Monitor 2 icon for the secondary display the external display 6 Select the Resolution and the Colors of the secondary display 7 Place the icons for the monitors so that they touch Note You can set the monitors in any relative position but the icons must touch each other 8 Click OK to apply the changes For Windows XP 1 Turn off the computer 2 Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet 3 Turn on the external monitor and the computer 4 Right click on the desktop and click Properties to open the Display Properties window 5 Click the Settings tab and click the Monitor 2 icon 6 Select the Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor check box and click Apply If the Monitor Settings window opens click Yes To change the resolution for each monitor do as follows 1 Click the Monitor 1 icon for the primary display the computer display Select the color quality and the screen resolution of the primary display Click the Monitor 2 icon for the secondary display the external display Select the color quality and the screen resolution of the secondary display a A O N Place the icons for the monitors so that they touch Note You can set the monitors in any relative position but the icons must touch each other
316. ttach your computer to the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 and use an external monitor connector use the external monitor connector on the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 not the one on the computer H When you attach a mechanical lock to the security keyhole the eject button is locked so that the computer cannot be removed from the ThinkPad Port Replicator Series 3 Chapter 7 Enhancing your computer 163 ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 HH 8H ogg 8 The power jack is for connecting the ac power adapter E The DisplayPort is for connecting a display device Efi The digital visual interface connector is for connecting a monitor that supports Single Link DVI Note The DVI connector provides a digital interface only This connector can be used with a computer that supports DVI via docking only EJ The headphone jack a jack 1 8 inch 3 5 mm in diameter is for connecting an external stereo headphone H The microphone jack a jack 1 8 inch 3 5 mm in diameter is for connecting an external microphone W W The Ethernet connector is for connecting the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 to an Ethernet LAN The indicator on the connector is the same as that on the computer Notes e You cannot use the Token Ring cable for this connector e You can use this connector for a 1OBASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Ethernet If you attach your computer to the ThinkPad Mini Dock Series 3 and use an Ethernet connector use the Ethernet connector on the
317. ttons at the bottom of the keyboard To move the pointer J on the screen slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the pointer to move The left and right bottom of the pad work as click buttons The functions correspond to those of the left and right mouse buttons on a conventional mouse Using the multi touch touch pad The touch pad of your computer supports multi touch with which you can zoom in zoom out scroll or rotate on the screen while browsing the Internet or reading or editing a document For details refer to the Help in the UltraNav Customizing the touch pad To customize the touch pad do as follows 1 Press Fn F8 A panel for UltraNav Device Settings pops up 2 Click Manage Settings to open the Mouse properties window 56 User Guide 3 Click the UltraNav tab and proceed to customizing the touch pad For details refer to the Help in the Utility Behavior of the UltraNav and an external mouse By default the TrackPoint and the touch pad are set to Enabled Note If you want to attach an external mouse to a USB connector select Disabled Disabling the TrackPoint or the touch pad If you want to disable the TrackPoint or the touch pad do either of the following e Use the Fn F8 key combination 1 Press Fn F8 A panel for UltraNav Device Settings pops up 2 To disable the TrackPoint select Enable touch pad only disable TrackPoint To disable the touch pad select Enable TrackP
318. tware layers Your computer system board has a module called electrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM also referred to as flash memory You can update UEFI BIOS and the Configuration ThinkPad Setup Program by starting your computer with a flash update optical disc or flash update tool application running on the Windwos environment In some instances when you add software hardware or a device driver you may be informed that you need to update your UEFI BIOS in order for the new addition to work properly To update your UEFI BIOS visit this Web site at http www lenovo com support site wss document do sitestyle lenovo amp lndocid tpad matrix Then follow the instructions on the screen Using system management This section is intended primarily for network administrators Your computer is designed for manageability so that you can redirect more of your resources to better meet your business objectives This manageability or Total Cost of Ownership TCO enables you to remotely power on your computer format the hard disk drive install the software of your choice for example Windows XP with user and system management applications and have the computer start up and function in the same way as an ordinary desktop PC Chapter 8 Advanced configuration 197 Once the computer is configured and operational you can manage it by use of software and manageability features already integrated into the client
319. ur computer is compatible with USB 1 1 and 2 0 i Media card reader slot Depending on the model your computer may have a media card reader slot The media card reader supports the following cards e SD card e SDHC card e SDXC card e MultiMediaCard Note Your computer does not support the CPRM feature for SD card Chapter 1 Product Overview 9 For details refer to the instructions in Using an ExpressCard a smart card or a flash media card on page 79 ThinkPad X220 Tablet and X220i Tablet right side view Figure 4 Right side view Security keyhole H Tablet Digitizer Pen Ell Hard disk drive or solid state drive EJ Combo audio jack H Ethernet connector J Always On USB connector Media card reader slot Security keyhole Your computer comes with a security keyhole You can purchase a security cable and lock to fit this keyhole B Tablet Digitizer Pen The Tablet Digitizer Pen is used to control your computer in Tablet mode on page 41 as you would a mouse and a keyboard E Hard disk drive or solid state drive Your computer may have a large capacity customer upgradable hard disk drive that can meet a variety of storage demands To keep the drive safe Active Protection System is installed on your computer For details refer to Access Connections on page 34 If you wish you can purchase another hard disk drive and install it in the Serial Ultrabay Slim in the ThinkPad Ultrabase Series 3 With Le
320. ur computer is now in the picture frame mode Note While rotating the display do not press the upper edge of either side of the display Chapter 2 Using your computer 41 3 Close the computer display slowly holding the upper left and right sides with both hands Note Make sure that the display is rotated at 180 degrees so that the back of the display faces the keyboard 4 Your computer is now in the tablet mode To return your computer to the notebook mode do as follows 1 Open the display by at least 45 degrees preferably by 90 degrees 42 User Guide 2 Follow the direction shown by the display swivel indicator and rotate the display slowly figure below shows counter clockwise rotation as an example until the front of the display is facing the keyboard 180 Your computer is now in the notebook mode Tips on using your computer in the tablet mode To close the computer display first make sure that the display either faces the keyboard or is positioned at 180 degrees to the keyboard so that the back of the display faces the keyboard Do not pick up or hold the computer by the display only Do not hit vibrate or bump the computer display To allow free ventilation do not place any obstacle such as a thick piled carpet or a soft cushion in front of the fan When you use the computer in the picture frame mode hold the display with one hand and use the Tablet Digitizer Pen If you hold the comput
321. uter Reinstall device drivers only when it is necessary to correct a problem with your computer To reinstall a device driver for a factory installed device do the following 1 Turn on your computer 2 Use Windows Explorer or Computer in Windows XP My Computer to display the directory structure of your hard disk drive 3 Open the C SWTOOLS folder 4 Open the DRIVERS folder Within the DRIVERS folder are several subfolders named for the various devices installed in your computer for example AUDIO and VIDEO 112 User Guide 5 Open the subfolder for the device 6 Reinstall the device driver using one of the following methods e Inthe subfolder for the device look for a text file a file with the extension txt The text file contains information on how to reinstall that device driver OR e f the subfolder for the device contains a file of setup information a file with the extension inf you can use the Add New Hardware program in the Windows Control Panel to reinstall the device driver Not all device drivers can be reinstalled by use of this program In the Add New Hardware program when prompted for the device driver you want to install click Have Disk and Browse Then select the device driver file from the device subfolder OR e Inthe subfolder for the device look for the file for the application a file with the extension exe Double click the file and follow the instructions on the screen Attentio
322. ve the pointer to All Programs to ThinkVantage and then to Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox If the Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox is not installed on your computer go to http web lenovothinkvantagetoolbox com click Download Lenovo ThinkVantage Toolbox and follow the instructions on the screen For more information about this program see the Help for the program Running any tests may take up to several minutes or longer Make sure you have time to run the entire test do not interrupt the test while it is running When preparing to contact the Customer Support Center be sure to print the test log so that you can rapidly provide information to the help technician Troubleshooting If your computer has an error it typically displays a message or an error code or a beep sounds when you turn it on To correct an error first find the description of the error in the left hand column of the chart that applies Then click that description to get a troubleshooting procedure To make sure that your computer has the features or options that are introduced in the following sections consult the online help or the list shipped with your computer Copyright Lenovo 2011 207 Computer stops responding Print these instructions now and keep it with your computer for reference later If your computer is completely unresponsive you cannot use the UltraNav pointing device or the keyboard do the following steps 1 Push and hold the power switc
323. vo ThinkVantage Toolbox on page 207 Modem and networking The following are the most common modem and networking problems Ethernet problems e Problem Your computer cannot connect to the network 212 User Guide Solution Make sure that The cable is installed properly The network cable must be securely connected both to the Ethernet connector of your computer and to the RJ45 connector of the hub The maximum allowable distance from the computer to hub is 100 meters If the cable is connected and the distance is within acceptable limits but the problem persists try a different cable You are using the correct device driver For Windows 7 and Windows Vista 1 Click Start and then click Control Panel 2 Click Hardware and Sound 3 Click Device Manager If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation 4 If the mark is to the left of the adapter name under Network adapters you might not use the correct driver or the driver is not enabled To update the driver right click the highlighted adapter 5 Click Update Driver Software and then follow the instructions on the screen For Windows XP Click Start and then click Control Panel Click Performance and Maintenance and then click System Click the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button AA OO N If the x mark is to the left of the adapter name under Network adapter you migh
324. w in Windows XP Volume Control window and are allowed to change the settings themselves An example is the Windows Media Player Usually the application has sliders available to control the sound from within the application Problem The volume sliders do not all fit in the Volume Control window in Windows XP Solution Press Ctrl S keys while the volume control is in focus and toggle to a smaller size Problem The balance slider cannot completely mute one channel Solution The control is designed to compensate for minor differences in balance and does not completely mute either channel Problem There is no volume control for MIDI sound on the Volume Mixer window in Windows XP Volume Control window Solution Use the hardware volume control In Windows XP use the hardware volume control or the Wave volume control on the Volume Control window This is because the Built In Synthesizer Software does not support the control Problem The sound cannot be turned off completely even if you set the Master volume control at minimum Solution You can still hear some sound even though you have set the Master volume control at minimum To turn off the sound completely go to the Master volume control and select Mute speakers in Windows Vista and Windows XP Mute Problem Sound does not come from a headphone or a speaker or your computer cannot record sounds when the SmartAudio is set to MULTI STREAM mode Windows Vista Solution To
325. w is displayed 90 User Guide Note You might want to note your power on password in a safe place Otherwise if you forget it you have to take your computer to a Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative to have the password canceled 11 Press F10 to exit Changing or removing the power on password To change the power on password follow the steps 1 through 9 above in Setting a power on password on page 90 typing your password to get access to the ThinkPad Setup To change the password do the following 1 In the Enter Current Password field type the current power on password 2 In the Enter New Password field type the new power on password then retype the password you just entered to verify it in the Confirm New Password field 3 Follow step 10 and step 11 above in Setting a power on password on page 90 to change your power on password To remove the password do the following 1 In the Enter Current Password field type the current power on password 2 Leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank 3 Follow step 10 and step 11 above in Setting a power on password on page 90 to remove your power on password Hard disk passwords Two types of hard disk passwords help protect the information stored on the hard disk e User hard disk password e Master hard disk password which requires a user hard disk password If a user hard disk password has been set but no master hard di
326. ways Note The pointer might drift This is not a defect Stop using the TrackPoint for a few seconds the pointer will stop moving 2 To select and drag as required by your software press the left or right click button with either thumb and move the TrackPoint pointing stick By enabling Press to Select you can make the TrackPoint pointing stick function the same as the left or right click button Customizing the TrackPoint You can customize the TrackPoint pointing device and its buttons as follows Switch the functions of the left and right buttons Change the sensitivity of the TrackPoint Enable the Press to Select function Enable the Magnifying Glass Enable the TrackPoint scrolling function Enable the TrackPoint Scrolling Tips To customize the TrackPoint do as follows 1 Press Fn F8 A panel for UltraNav Device Settings pops up 2 Click Manage Settings to open the Mouse properties window 3 Click the UltraNav tab Under TrackPoint proceed to changing the settings For details refer to the Help in the Utility Changing the cap The cap on the end of the TrackPoint pointing stick is removable You can replace it as shown in the drawing Chapter 2 Using your computer 55 Note If you replace the keyboard a new keyboard is shipped with the default cap If you wish you can keep the cap from your old keyboard and use it on the new one Using the touch pad The touch pad is below the TrackPoint bu
327. ween the mute state and the un mute state by pressing the microphone mute button If you want to toggle one of the recording devices between the mute state and the un mute state do the following 1 2 3 Press Fn F6 The Communications settings window opens Click the Manage Settings button The Communications Utility window opens On the VoIP Call Settings tab click Microphone mute button settings The Setting for Microphone Mute window opens Select Only the recording device selected below Then select the recording device from the drop down list box Click OK Windows key and Application key The following two keys are on your computer keyboard E Windows key If you press this key the Start menu of Windows is displayed or hidden If you press this key and another key at the same time the System Properties window or the Computer in Windows XP My Computer window is displayed For details refer to the Help in Windows operating system B Application key Chapter 2 Using your computer 53 To display the shortcut menu for an object select the object on the desktop or within an application and then press this key Using the UltraNav pointing device Your computer may come with the UltraNav pointing device The UltraNav consists of the TrackPoint and the touch pad each of which is itself a pointing device with both basic and extended functions You can configure both devices by choosing the settings y
328. will reduce damage from short circuits 3 Wait until you are certain that all the liquid is dry before turning on your computer Note If you want to replace your keyboard you can purchase a new one 208 User Guide Error messages Message 0176 System Security The System has been tampered with Solution This message is displayed if you remove the Security Chip and reinstall it or install a new one To clear the error enter the ThinkPad Setup If this does not solve the problem have the computer serviced Message 0177 Bad SVP data stop POST task Solution Checksum of the supervisor password in the EEPROM is not correct The system board should be replaced Have the computer serviced Message 0182 Bad CRC of Security Settings in EEPROM Enter ThinkPad Setup Solution Checksum of the Security settings in the EEPROM is not correct Enter ThinkPad Setup to check Security settings Press F10 and then press Enter to restart the system If you still have a problem have the computer serviced Message 0183 Bad CRC of Security Settings in EFI Variable Enter ThinkPad Setup Solution Checksum of the Security settings in the EFI Variable is not correct Enter ThinkPad Setup to check Security settings Press F10 and then press Enter to restart the system If you still have a problem have the computer serviced Message 0187 EAIA data access error Solution The access to EEPROM is failed Have the computer serviced
329. wing e For Windows 7 See Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 e For Windows Vista and Windows XP Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage gt Access Connections 34 User Guide Active Protection System The Active Protection System protects your hard disk drive when the shock sensor inside your computer detects a condition that could damage the drive such as system tilt excessive vibration or shock The hard disk drive is less vulnerable to damage when it is not operating so the system stops it from spinning and may also move the read write heads of the drive to areas that do not contain data As soon as the shock sensor senses that the environment is stable again minimal change in system tilt vibration or shock it turns the hard disk drive on To open Active Protection System do the following e For Windows 7 See Accessing applications in Windows 7 on page 33 e For Windows Vista and Windows XP Click Start gt All Programs gt ThinkVantage Active Protection System Client Security Solution The Client Security Solution helps protect your computer and your personal information so that you know that your sensitive data is secure It can also help manage your passwords help recover a forgotten password or help you monitor security settings on your computer and suggest how to enhance your computer security These convenient features are made more secure by a built in security chip a
330. y click Customize and proceed to customize the settings on hr Ww DY Chapter 2 Using your computer 57 You can now change the properties of UltraNav by clicking the UltraNav icon on the system tray Power management When you need to use your computer away from electrical outlets you depend on battery power to keep your computer running Different computer components consume power at different rates The more you use the power intensive components the faster you consume battery power Do more save more and spend more time unplugged with ThinkPad batteries Mobility has revolutionized business by allowing you to take your work where ever you go With ThinkPad batteries you will be able to work longer without being tied to an electrical outlet Checking battery status The Power Manager Battery Gauge in the task tray displays the percentage of battery power remaining The rate at which you use battery power will determine how long you can use the battery of your computer between charges Because each computer user has different habits and needs it is difficult to predict how long a battery charge will last There are two main factors e How much energy is stored in the battery when you begin to work e The way you use your computer how often you access the hard disk drive or the solid state drive how bright you make the computer display Using the ac power adapter The power to run your computer can come either from the lith
331. ystem you can use the rescue files feature of the Rescue and Recovery workspace to copy files from your hard disk drive to other media To start the Rescue and Recovery workspace do the following 1 Make sure the computer is turned off 2 Repeatedly press and release the F11 key when turning on the computer When you hear beeps or see a logo screen release the F11 key 3 If you have set a Rescue and Recovery password type your password when prompted The Rescue and Recovery workspace opens after a short delay 110 User Guide Note If the Rescue and Recovery workspace fails to open see Solving recovery problems on page 113 4 Do one of the following e To rescue files from your hard disk drive or from a backup click Rescue files and follow the instructions on the screen e To restore your hard disk drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup or to restore your hard disk drive to the factory default settings click Restore your system and follow the instructions on the screen For more information about the features of the Rescue and Recovery workspace click Help Notes 1 After restoring your hard disk drive to the factory default settings you might have to reinstall device drivers for some devices See Reinstalling preinstalled applications and device drivers on page 112 2 Some computers come with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works preinstalled If you need to recover or reinstall your Microsoft Office or Micr

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Nord Electro 5取扱説明書  Essick Air 5D6 700 User's Manual  SMI-2 Preliminary Manual ()  Onbrez Breezhaler, INN-indacaterol  Harbor Freight Tools 7 Function Digital Multimeter Product manual  INSTRUCTION MANUAL & SERVICE MANUAL  LQ 222  Installer and user reference guide VRV IV system air  Avaya CallPilot Message Networking User Guide  P370/P470 Keyless RF Scanners Product  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file